JP7587664B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to a favorable state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that is controlled to a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the display of seven symbols stopped in a line on a decorative symbol display device.

JP 2014-147575 A

The gaming machine described above is configured to issue a right-hit instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball launch handle during the jackpot start performance, but there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in such a specific direction.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can optimally execute instructions that prompt the player to launch a gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
a recovery display means for displaying a recovery display when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
The second guidance display is displayed during a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed,
performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period that is within the predetermined period and that is subsequent to the first period;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
During a period in which an end effect related to the end of the control of the advantageous state is being executed, the second guidance display is displayed;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
The guidance light emission is light emission in a pattern in which the light emission point moves from the first region side to the second region side,
The guide light emitting means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means can emit light in a manner different from a light-emitting manner of the light-emitting means during the guidance light emission,
turning off the light emitting means before the second period begins;
When the second period starts, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display;
in either case where a power interruption occurs while the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being displayed during the second period, or where a power interruption occurs while the second guidance display is being displayed during a period following the specified period, when power supply to the gaming machine is subsequently started, the recovery display is performed and the second guidance display is commonly displayed while the recovery display is being displayed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, instructions prompting the player can be executed in an optimal manner.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A storage section (e.g., a ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing a game medium (e.g., a game ball P);
A payout unit (e.g., a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming section (e.g., a first guide passage forming section 202 or a second guide passage forming section 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (e.g., a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section;
A cover portion (e.g., a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) for limiting the fall of the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover portion into the guide passage forming portion (see FIGS. 22 and 24 ),
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (e.g., holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the discharge portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27),
The predetermined restriction portion (e.g., the long holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336) is provided so that the game medium that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without being retained thereon,
moreover,
a launching means capable of launching game media into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start effect notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued;
The second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion, and it is also possible to preferably execute instructions urging the player.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as those shown in JP Patent Publication No. 2014-147575, have been configured to issue a right-hit instruction that prompts the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle during the execution of the jackpot start performance. However, there is still room for improvement in such instructions that prompt the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction, and in light of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can suitably execute instructions that prompt the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a launching means capable of launching game media into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start effect notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued;
The second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.
According to this feature, an instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction can be preferably executed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a plan view showing a frame for a gaming machine with a gaming board attached thereto. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine as seen diagonally from behind. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board has been removed from the game machine frame. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of a passage forming body to a frame for an amusement machine. FIG. An enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the rear of the gaming machine frame. 4A is a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. 1A is a plan view showing a first induction passage forming portion, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D of FIG. 1A is a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F of FIG. 1A is a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H of FIG. (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ of (A), (D) is an oblique view showing the third cover body, and (E) is an oblique view showing the ball stopping member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first induction passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopping member is in a first state, and (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first induction passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopping member is in a second state. 1A is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K--K of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L--L of FIG. This is an oblique view showing the area around the ball tank section on the back of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the area around the ball tank section on the back of the game frame, and (B) is an M-M cross-sectional view of (A). This is an oblique view showing the area around the first guide passage forming portion on the back of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. A plan view showing the area around the first guide passage forming portion on the back of the game frame. 21A is a cross-sectional view taken along line N--N in FIG. 21, FIG. 21B is a diagram showing the rotating state of the screw member, and FIG. 21C is a cross-sectional view taken along line O--O in FIG. 21A is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line R-R in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S of Figure 21. (A) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopping member is in a first state, (B) is a T-T cross-sectional view of (A), (C) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopping member is in a second state, and (D) is a U-U cross-sectional view of (C). 6 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion, showing a moving state of the screw member. FIG. A vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. 13A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine in the characteristic section 053SG. A diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. 1 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 1 on which an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of a game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing a wiring pattern branching off from a data bus on the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the connection state of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. A figure showing the game control board in Example 1 stored in the board case. 1 is a circuit diagram for supplying backup power to a game control microcomputer mounted on a game control board in Example 1. FIG. A diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. A figure showing an example of a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is installed in a game machine. A figure showing an example of a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is installed in a game machine. A diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. A diagram showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. A diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the solder side of a game control board in Example 2 in relation to the connection between a game control microcomputer and an input circuit and an output circuit. A diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 2 in relation to the connection between a game control microcomputer and an input circuit and an output circuit. A circuit diagram showing the connection between a game control microcomputer and an input circuit and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. 11A and 11B are oblique views showing the structure of a specific electronic component mounted on a game control board in Example 3, where (A) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from above, and (B) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from below. A cross-sectional view showing the state in which specific electronic components are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to a characteristic portion of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. An explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance processing during a jackpot. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing after a jackpot has ended. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting state of a lamp. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1 hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the second round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A storage section (e.g., a ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing a game medium (e.g., a game ball P);
A payout unit (e.g., a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming section (e.g., a first guide passage forming section 202 or a second guide passage forming section 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (e.g., a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section;
The present invention is characterized by the following:

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
a cover portion (e.g., a cover portion 314 of a first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of a second cover body 320, and a cover portion 334 of a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion,
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined restriction portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) for restricting the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover portion from falling into the induction passage forming portion (e.g., first induction passage forming portion 202) (see Figures 22 and 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect,
The specified restriction portions (e.g., long holes 316A-316C, grooves 326A-326C, recess 336) are characterized in that they are arranged to allow game media that have fallen onto the cover portion to fall from the cover portion without being retained therein.
According to this feature, the game medium does not get stuck in the designated restriction portion, and a state in which the screw member can always be retained can be maintained, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect,
The predetermined restriction portion includes a first retention portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retention portion (e.g., grooves 326A to 326C) that can retain a screw member (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen onto the cover portion on the cover portion,
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (e.g., the dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention section as it approaches the dispensing section, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen onto the cover section from moving and falling into the guide passage forming section.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The induction path forming portion (e.g., the first induction path forming portion 202) is provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (e.g., holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the induction path forming portion to the dispensing portion (e.g., the dispensing device 200) (see Figures 12 and 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to fall outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the discharge portion (L11>L2, see FIG. 11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed into the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the payout portion. Also, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game media from being hindered by the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The plurality of holes each have a different size,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimensions of the other holes 271A to 271G. See FIG. 12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member can be preferably dropped outside the guide passage forming portion through the specified hole portion, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine of aspect 6 or 7,
a non-covered region (e.g., non-covered region 350) that is not covered by the cover portion (e.g., cover portion 314 of first cover body 310, cover portion 324 of second cover body 320, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) on the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
At least some of the specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered regions in the induction passage formation portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming portion from the uncoated region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion through the hole.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
The storage section (e.g., the ball tank forming section 201) is provided in a game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3),
The storage section includes:
The play frame is disposed on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (e.g., the first protrusion 224) of the play frame,
The upper surface of the predetermined portion is in close proximity to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that a screw member does not enter between the upper surface of the predetermined portion and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from getting caught between the designated portion of the game frame and the storage portion and causing damage to the member.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A first board (e.g., a main board 11, a performance control board 12, etc.) attached to a position lower than the guide path forming part (e.g., a first guide path forming part 202),
A second board (e.g., a terminal board 210) attached to a position above the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The first board is attached by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is attached by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are attached to the game board 2 by a screw member, while the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and locking parts 236 as a mounting means different from the screw members. See FIG. 17).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., a terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., a cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first board has a smaller number of wires connected thereto than the external output board (for example, the number of connections of the cable C that can be connected to the multiple connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming section 202 is a first number (for example, 20), while the respective signal lines are also connected to the second boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming section 202, but the number of the signal lines is a second number (for example, 10) that is smaller than the first number).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to external forces during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with screw members, thereby preventing the screw members from coming loose and falling into the guide passage forming section due to external force being applied to the external output board.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth or eleventh aspect,
A game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage section (e.g., a ball tank forming section 201);
A mounting frame (e.g., a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for limiting the movement of the screw member that has dropped into the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from becoming mixed into the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
A special restriction portion (e.g., recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) is provided around the induction passage forming portion (e.g., the first induction passage forming portion 202) to restrict the screw members (e.g., the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moving toward the induction passage forming portion from falling into the induction passage forming portion (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from dropping into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect,
The special restriction portion is a special retention portion (e.g., recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can retain a screw member (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moving toward the guide passage forming portion (e.g., the first guide passage forming portion 202) before the screw member reaches the guide passage forming portion, and is provided below the screw member attached to the mounting portion,
The screw member that has come off the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A) and FIG. 23(B) and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has come off the mounted portion from dropping into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth or fourteenth aspect,
The special retention portion is a recess (e.g., recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is a depth from which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A) and FIG. 23(B) and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member that is stuck in the recess can be easily removed.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifteenth aspects,
a cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., the first guide passage forming portion 202);
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion,
A specific portion (e.g., a ball stopper member 340) capable of retaining the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion on the cover portion is provided on the side of the dispensing portion in the inclined direction of the cover portion (see FIGS. 15, 26, and 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth aspect,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) can be changed between a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down, and a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult or impossible to flow down (for example, the first state in which the rotating portion 341 is in an upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the second state in which the rotating portion 341 is in a tilted position and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 to be able to contact the game ball, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204).
The screw member is more likely to remain when the specific portion is in the second state than when the specific portion is in the first state (see FIG. 26 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to an eighteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth or seventeenth aspect,
The cover portion is
a first cover portion (e.g., cover portion 324 of first cover body 310, cover portion 324 of second cover body 320) provided with a retaining portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion on the cover portion;
a second cover portion (e.g., a cover portion 334 of a third cover body 330) that is different from the first cover portion and in which the specific portion is provided;
The present invention is characterized in that it includes:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eighteenth aspect,
The second cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (e.g., the screw member N16) having a loosening prevention portion (e.g., a flange portion F) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th aspects,
The storage section (e.g., the ball tank forming section 201) is provided in a game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3),
The storage section is attached to the game frame at a plurality of points by screw members (e.g., screw members N11 to N14) having anti-loosening portions,
The screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section (for example, the first guide passage forming section 202) to the game frame are attached so that they fall outside the guide passage forming section even if they come off the game frame (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member attaching the storage section is less likely to come off the game frame, while even if the screw member attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section comes off, it will fall outside the guide passage forming section, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the payout section.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20,
Among the multiple screw members for attaching the storage section (e.g., the ball tank forming section 201) and the guide passage forming section (e.g., the first guide passage forming section 202) to the game frame (e.g., the game machine frame 3), a predetermined screw member (e.g., the screw member N12) near the peripheral portion of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (e.g., the ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the number of screw members can be reduced, so that the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine of aspect 20 or 21,
The screw members (e.g., screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (e.g., ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) are attached to a metal member (e.g., metal plate 222) for reinforcing the game frame (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the storage portion can be attached firmly.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 20 to 22,
The screw members (e.g., screw members N3 to N6) attached to an upper position of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) in the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3) are characterized in that they are different screw members from the screw member having the anti-loosening portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 20 to 23,
The game machine includes a game board (e.g., a game board 2) that is detachable from the game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3),
In the area below the guide path forming portion (e.g., the first guide path forming portion 202) in the game board, an inclined surface (e.g., the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) capable of causing the fallen screw member to flow down is provided (see Figures 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing back into the guide passage forming portion again.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 1 to 24,
A cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 360 of the first modified example) is provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The induction passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (e.g., a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending so as to incline downward toward one side (e.g., the left side);
a second passage forming portion (e.g., a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from a lower end portion of the first passage forming portion;
having
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 29(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 2 to 25,
A wiring (e.g., a cable CH) is provided in a position near the predetermined limiting portion (e.g., the recess 361) in the cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 360 in the first modified example) so as to cross the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 29B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member becomes easily caught in the wiring and becomes lodged in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned will be referred to as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be referred to as the rear. The following description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions as seen by the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50, and when the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 2b are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a spacer member attached integrally to the rear side of the board plate. The game board 2 may also be made of a non-translucent material such as plywood, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 2b are provided on the front surface of the game board.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the bottom left of the game area Y), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided, which perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c on the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a start winning port door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the start winning port door is in a closed position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in an on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that have an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

When a game ball enters each winning port, including the general winning port, it is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball entering a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (bottom left of the game area Y in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is an outlet (not shown) that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area Y. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area Y using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a payout outlet is provided through which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full. A ball supply tray (lower tray) may also be provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Fig. 3), an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board 91 (see Fig. 3), etc.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The CPU 103 also determines whether a first start winning or a second start winning has occurred, and if a winning has occurred, executes a start winning process in which it extracts random numbers for determining the special chart display result, the type of jackpot, the fluctuation pattern, etc., and stores (memorizes) them at the top of the free entries in the first special chart reserve memory section or the second special chart reserve memory section.

The CPU 103 also executes a normal special pattern process to determine whether or not to start a special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in the first special pattern reserved memory unit and the second special pattern reserved memory unit, and to determine (predetermine) whether or not the variable display result of the special pattern or performance pattern is to be a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the special pattern display result, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special pattern game, the CPU 103 executes a process to determine (by lottery) whether or not to derive and display a jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number value stored when the start winning occurs.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 3 to 7. Figure 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. Figure 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. Figure 5 is a plan view showing the gaming machine frame with the gaming board attached. Figure 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine as seen diagonally from behind. Figure 7 is a perspective view showing the gaming board removed from the gaming machine frame. Note that the glass door frame 50 is omitted from Figures 5 to 7.

As shown in Figures 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably attached, a glass door frame 50 that is provided so that the front of the game machine frame 3 can be opened and closed around the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a square-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed around the left side, and can be installed on a game island (not shown) installed in an amusement park by fixing the outer frame 60 to the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a first passage forming body 203 is provided extending in the left-right direction along the upper edge 3A of the game machine frame 3. The first passage forming body 203 is made up of a ball tank forming section 201 that forms a storage section capable of storing game balls supplied from a circulation path for game balls (hereinafter sometimes referred to as game balls P) provided inside the game island (not shown) via a supply device 150 (see Figures 3 and 4), and a first guide passage forming section 202 that forms a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 toward the left side. In addition, a terminal board 210 (described later) is provided above the first guide passage forming section 202.

The supply device 150 has a guide member 150A consisting of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding game balls in the circulation path of the game island, a sprocket (not shown) capable of sending out a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) of game balls guided by the guide member 150A, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and a lever switch (not shown) that is pressed against the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in a closed state in which it is closed by the game machine frame 3; in the closed state, when the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3, the game balls sent out by the sprocket can fall into the ball tank forming section 201, and in the open state, when the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3, the game balls sent out by the sprocket are held so that they cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in a closed state, the sprocket rotates with the drive source, and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out and supplied to the ball tank forming section 201. In addition, the supply device 150 is configured by assembling multiple members with multiple screw members (not shown) to form a case body 150B, which is fixed to a predetermined location on the game island using multiple screw members (not shown).

The second passage forming body 207 is made up of a second guide passage forming section 204 that forms a second guide passage that guides downward the game balls guided to the left by the first guide passage forming section 202, a payout device 200 that constitutes a payout section capable of paying out the game balls guided by the second guide passage forming section 204, a payout passage forming section 205 that guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player, and a ball removal passage forming section 206 that forms a ball removal passage that guides the game balls guided by the second guide passage forming section 204 to a discharge section (not shown) provided at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to discharge them outside the pachinko game machine 1 without paying them out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming section 205.

The payout device 200 is made up of a case body formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is provided inside with a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball at a time), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, a switching valve that can switch the flow path of the game balls between a payout passage and a ball removal passage, and an operating lever for operating the switching valve. In addition, the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a board case 91A that houses a power supply board 91, a board case 37A that houses a payout control board 37, and the like.

In this embodiment, a ball failure switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 constantly monitors whether there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage upstream of the payout device 200 based on the input state of the detection signal from the ball failure switch (not shown). If the ball failure switch (not shown) remains off for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason, such as ball clogging, that is, a supply error has occurred, and the payout operation by the payout device 200 is stopped. In addition, a supply error is displayed on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11, and a supply error command is output to the performance control board 12, so that the performance control CPU 120 can execute a notification process that a supply error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front of the glass door frame 50 to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged in the opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-shaped body 2a consisting of the board panel and spacer member described above, various game parts (e.g., obstacle nails and winning devices) provided on the front side of the plate-shaped body 2a, an image display device 5 provided on the rear side of the plate-shaped body 2a, a performance device having a movable body 32, electronic parts such as a board case 12A in which the performance control board 12 is stored and a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a cover body 220 that protects the plate-shaped part, the performance device, the electronic parts, etc.

The circuit board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed so that each circuit board can be stored inside using a base member and a cover member made of transparent synthetic resin material, and among these, the circuit board cases 11A and 12A are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20 and N21 (see Figure 3), respectively, and the circuit board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by a locking means (not shown). The cover body 220 is formed into a box shape made of transparent synthetic resin material with an open front, and part of the back surface is an opening/closing part 220A that can rotate around the right side, making it possible to open and close part of the back surface of the game board 2.

As shown in Figures 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the gaming board 2, protrude rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the top opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, so that when the outer frame 60 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island (not shown), gaming balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming part 201 from the circulation path above the gaming island via the supply device 150.

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 8 and Fig. 9. Fig. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. Fig. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the rear surface of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 221 for mounting the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back of the upper edge portion 3A above the opening 221, facing in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material capable of covering the metal plate 222 from the rear side, and is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing the screw members N1 to N5 attached from the rear side to the multiple mounting holes H1 to H5 facing the front-rear direction into the multiple screw holes formed in the metal plate 222. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, a three-dimensional second protrusion 225 consisting of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C protrudes rearward.

The first protrusion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225, and the ball tank forming section 201 is disposed above it. The first guide passage forming section 202 is disposed behind the rear wall 225B of the second protrusion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is attached above it. The board mounting frame 211 is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 attached from the back side to the mounting hole H6 formed at the top into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223, with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower edge inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall 225B.

In this way, the mounting member 223 has a first protruding portion 224 and a second protruding portion 225 that protrude rearward, and is formed to cover the upper part of the game board 2. This prevents game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the top of the game island from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the screw members N11 to N14 attached from the rear side to the multiple mounting holes H11 to H14, and the screw member N15 attached from above to the mounting hole H15, into multiple screw holes formed in the mounting member 223. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the earth wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 to remove the electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. In addition, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above to the mounting hole H16 into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203.

As shown in the enlarged view of Figure 8, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 consist of a male thread portion NS and a head portion NH. Of these, screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 are flanged screws in which a flange portion F is integrally formed on the seat surface of the head as an anti-loosening portion. By increasing the contact area of the seat surface and increasing frictional force, they are screw members that are less likely to loosen than screw members N3 to N6.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH.

The screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 may be of any size and type, and the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members with an integral flange F (washer). Instead of the flange F, a washer separate from the screw member may be attached to the screw member, and the flange F and washer constitute the anti-loosening portion of the present invention. The screw member includes members such as screws and bolts that will come off from the attached portion when loosened. The anti-loosening portion also includes the head NH or the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the flange F (washer), adhesive, etc.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 is required to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming section 201, and is formed in a concave shape with an open top so that ball clogging is less likely to occur in the first guide passage, and so that if ball clogging does occur, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 are arranged to cover the upper surface of the area where the game balls that are stacked vertically in the ball tank forming section 201 flow into the first guide passage forming section 202, and the third cover body 330 is arranged to cover the upper surface of the area where the game balls flow from the first guide passage forming section 202 into the second guide passage forming section 204, so that the game balls are rectified. However, although a portion of the upper opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by these first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330, the upper openings of the ball tank forming section 201 and the uncovered area 350 (see Figure 27) are open.

On the other hand, multiple screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 are arranged near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203 to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the mounting member 223. Also, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, there are arranged a large number of screw members (not shown) for assembling the framework that constitutes the gaming island, screw members (not shown) for attaching various devices (such as the replenishing device 150) arranged inside the gaming island to the framework, and multiple screw members for assembling multiple members that constitute the case bodies of the various devices.

If these screw members become loose and fall out due to vibrations or impacts occurring in the game island or pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibrations, impacts or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and fall from the uncovered area 350 of the ball tank forming section 201 or the first guide passage forming section 202 into the interior, and become mixed into the guide passage for game balls. In particular, the supply device 150 is located immediately above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in Figures 3 and 4, and is a device that is prone to vibration when a certain number of game balls are sent to the ball tank forming section 201 and new game balls are supplied from the circulation path of the game island, or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed. Therefore, if the screw members (not shown) for attaching the supply device 150 to the frame of the game island, or the multiple screw members for assembling the multiple members that make up the case body 150B of the supply device 150, loosen and fall out due to vibration, there is an extremely high possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming section 201 or the first guide passage forming section 202.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming section 201 or the first guide passage forming section 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 along with the game balls flowing down, and may eventually become mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the screw member may damage the sprocket or switching valve, balls may become jammed, putting a strain on the payout motor and causing it to break down, or the screw member may be paid out to the player along with the game balls, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

In this embodiment, as described below, various measures are taken to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming section 202 from entering the payout device 200, causing the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or to prevent the screw member from being paid out to the player along with the game balls.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 16. Fig. 10A is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and Fig. 10B is a perspective view showing the first passage forming body. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and FIG. 11C is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 12A is a plan view showing the first induction passage forming portion, and FIG. 12B is a sectional view taken along the line D-D of FIG. 12A. FIG. 14A is a plan view showing the first cover body, FIG. 14B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E of FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of FIG. 1A; and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H of FIG. 15A is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ of (A), and (D) is a cross-sectional view showing the third cover body. 16A shows the first guide passage forming portion when the ball stopper member is in the first state, and FIG. 16B shows the ball stopper member when the ball stopper member is in the first state. 1A is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and FIG. 1B is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion when the ball stopper member is in the second state.

As shown in Figures 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and is formed into a concave or groove shape with an open top by a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guide passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 consists of an upstream portion extending diagonally backward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. The front-rear dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and it is capable of storing more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually slope downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 naturally flow down the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is protruding from the outer surface of the right-side vertical wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11, H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed on the top and bottom of the mounting piece 261. In addition, a mounting piece 265 is protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is protruding from the outer surface of the left-side vertical wall portion 203B of the first induction passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is protruding forward from the outer surface of the front-side vertical wall portion 203B of the upstream portion of the first induction passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is protruding from the front edge of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the multiple screw members N11 to N15 attached to these mounting holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the mounting member 223. In addition, a recess 280 having a generally rectangular shape in plan view is formed in a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in Figures 11 and 12, holes 270A, 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall 203A and the rear upright wall 203B in the upstream part of the first guide path forming part 202 (see Figure 11 (A)). At approximately the center in the front-to-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A, 271B, multiple holes 271A to 271H are formed toward the downstream side. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall 203A at the downstream end of the first guide path forming part 202 to allow game balls to drop into the second guide path forming part 204 below.

A serpentine section 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming section 202, which causes the game ball to snake back and forth while flowing down toward the left side, and among the multiple holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed at positions corresponding to the serpentine section 273. By providing such a serpentine section 273, it is possible to prevent the ball pressure from being increased by the following balls.

The distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and the lower portion of 203B of the first guide path forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, but shorter than twice the dimension of the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm) (11 mm < L10 < 22 mm). In other words, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so that it can guide the game balls in a single row toward the downstream side.

The front-to-rear dimension L11 of the holes 271A-271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3-N6 described above (L11>L2), so that even if the screw members N3-N6 get mixed into the first guide passage forming part 202 as described below, the screw members N3-N6 can fall from the holes 271A-271H. In addition, the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (the dimension in the direction in which the game ball flows down) compared to the other holes 271A-271G, so that the screw members N3-N6 can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming part 202 before reaching the communication hole 272.

In other words, these holes 271A-271H constitute a specific restriction section for restricting the movement of the screw members N3-N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since dirt, dust, or other parts other than the screw members can also fall from these multiple holes 271A-271H, ball clogging is prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in Figures 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 is mainly composed of an attachment portion 311 which extends along the upper edge of the front vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and has a downward C-shaped cross-section that can be fitted from above into the upper end of the vertical wall portion 203B, a vertical wall portion 312 which extends from the right side of the attachment portion 311 toward the rear, a plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 which extends from the lower part of the vertical wall portion 312 and slopes downward toward the right side (the ball tank forming portion 201 side), a cover portion 314 which extends from the lower part of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (the first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and a plurality of engagement portions 315A to 315D which are formed to be elastically deformable on the front side of the attachment portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

The first cover body 310 thus configured is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by fitting the mounting portion 311 from above to the upper end of the front vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 positioned near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the multiple locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locking portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. In the attached state, the ball pressing portion 313 is positioned to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is positioned to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is positioned so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding section 313 is positioned on the ball tank forming section 201 side, so that even if the game balls supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the game island (not shown) are stored so as to be stacked vertically, as the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming section 202 side, they are pressed downward by the ball holding section 313, thereby rectifying the flow.

The cover portion 314 is formed with long holes 316A-316C that extend in the left-right direction and have a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a plan view, and are arranged in a row parallel to each other, penetrating vertically. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball and shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 described above (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed to a size that prevents the game ball and the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling out. In addition, reinforcing ribs hang down from the periphery of each of the long holes 316A-316C on the underside of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended in the direction in which the game ball flows downward, as shown in Figures 13(B) and (C), when the game ball P falls into the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, the game ball P can move in the direction in which the game ball flows downward (to the left).

(Second cover body 320)
14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 is mainly composed of a plate-shaped cover part 324 formed along the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a plurality of locking parts 325A, 325B formed elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the cover part 324, and is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by elastically locking the plurality of locking parts 325A, 325B to the locked part 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall part 302B with the right end part of the cover part 324 being brought close to the left end part of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

On the top surface of the cover portion 324, grooves 326A-326C are formed in a row extending in the left-right direction. The grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-back dimensions L22A-L22C, each of which is shorter than the diameter 2R of a game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The front-to-back dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest front-to-back dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 mentioned above (L22B>L2). In other words, the groove 326B is formed to a size that cannot accommodate a game ball, but can accommodate the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16. Additionally, the front-to-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A-316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-to-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-to-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1), and are therefore large enough to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the direction in which the game ball flows and are arranged so as to slope downward toward the direction in which the game ball flows, so that when the game ball P falls into the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, as shown in Figures 14 (B) and (C), the game ball P is guided toward the direction in which the game ball flows (to the left).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 so as to be elastically deformable, and a mounting portion 335C, which is provided between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface and has a mounting hole H15 into which a screw member N15 is attached from above. The cover portion 334 is mainly composed of a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334, and a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B, and is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 into a screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 of a predetermined depth is provided on the top surface from the right end to the left side. A part of the right side reaches the serpentine portion 273, so it is formed to correspond to the shape of the serpentine portion 273. In addition, a slit 337 having a horizontally elongated U-shape in a plan view is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 336, forming a straightening plate 338 that can elastically deform so that the left end side swings up and down, and an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed at the right end, so that the game balls P stacked up and down can be guided and pressed toward the bottom wall portion 203A while being leveled (see FIG. 16).

The front-to-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 described above (L23>2R, L23>L2). In other words, the recess 336 is formed to a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16. In addition, the front-to-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, the recess 336 is extended along the direction in which the game ball flows and is positioned so as to incline downward toward the direction in which the game ball flows. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15(D), when the game ball P falls on the top of the recess 336, the game ball P is guided toward the direction in which the game ball flows (to the left).

In addition, the front-to-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 < L2), so the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 will not fall out of the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 is composed of a rotating part 341 having a plate-like front wall part 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall part 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall part 341A, a left wall part 341C connecting the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B, and a protruding wall part 341D protruding from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. On the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334, bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected. In addition, a slit 344 is formed on the right side of the bearing part 343A in the cover part 334, through which the front wall part 341A can be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), so that the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are allowed to flow down and be leveled, and finally allowed to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that the game balls are pressed downward to be leveled (straightened) to an extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball Stopping Member 340)
As shown in Figure 16 (A), the ball stopping member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating part 341 stands upward and a tilted position in which it tilts to the right, and is changeable between a first state in which the rotating part 341 is in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, allowing the game ball in the first guide passage forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204, and a second state, i.e., a ball stopping state, in which the rotating part 341 is in the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball in the first guide passage forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide path forming section 204, and in this state it is possible to remove the game balls from within the second guide path forming section 204 and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the pivoting portion 341 is open, and the space surrounded by the wall portion that is generally U-shaped in plan view and consists of the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 can be retained, as described below. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the pivoting portion 341 tilts, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D, as described below.

(Terminal Board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on Fig. 17 with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 17A is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, Fig. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K of Fig. 17A, and Fig. 17C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L of Fig. 17B.

8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is provided on the rear with a cable connection section (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11, etc. is attached and detached, and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. At positions corresponding to each connection hole 231 inside the mounting member 232, a connection pinch (not shown) for clamping the tip of each cable C is provided. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connection pinch in a direction to close, i.e., in a direction to clamp the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operating sections 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of the spring (not shown).

The number of connections of the cable C that can be connected to the multiple connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming section 202 is a first number (e.g., 20), while each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming section 202, but the number of connections is a second number (e.g., 10) that is less than the first number.

The operating parts 233 are provided in a plurality corresponding to each connection hole 231, and are generally hook-shaped in side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side as the swing axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is opened, the operating part 233 is pressed upward or downward to swing the operating part 233, thereby opening the connection pinch (not shown). Then, when the end of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch opened, and the pressing operation of the operating part 233 is stopped, the connecting pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown), and the cable C is held. Note that the operating parts 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a specific operating part 233 is pressed, the adjacent operating parts 233 do not get in the way of the pressing operation.

The board mounting frame 211 is attached to the mounting member 223 by inserting the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the bottom edge into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B, and then screwing the screw member N6 attached from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223. In addition, the board mounting frame 211 is formed with an opening 234 in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape.

The inner surface of the board mounting frame 211 has a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, a plurality of locking portions 236 that can elastically lock from the front side to the periphery of the terminal board 210 whose forward movement is restricted by the restricting portions 235, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts against the periphery of the terminal board 210 to determine the placement position. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by the locking portions 236 elastically locking in a state in which the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting portions 235. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using the plurality of restricting portions 235 and the locking portions 236 as mounting means other than the screw members (by a mounting method other than the mounting method using the screw members).

The terminal board 210 has multiple connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, so when connecting multiple cables C to the connection holes 231, it is necessary to operate the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and an amusement parlor staff member or the like opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging down from the top of the game island may be pulled around to the front of the outer frame 60, putting tension on the connection part. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is susceptible to load on the mounting part, if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member will loosen and become easily removed, so it is mounted using a mounting method that does not use a screw member.

When the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). Since the operating portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the operating portions 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described below. In addition, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211.

(Installation state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to Figs. 18 to 21. Fig. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of the game frame as viewed obliquely from behind. Fig. 19 is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of the game frame, and Fig. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back surface of the game frame as viewed obliquely from behind. Fig. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back surface of the game frame. Fig. 22 is a N-N cross-sectional view of Fig. 21, Fig. 22 is a view showing the rotation state of the screw members, and Fig. 22 is an O-O cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. Fig. 23 is a P-P cross-sectional view of Fig. 21, and Fig. 23 is a Q-Q cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. Fig. 24 is an R-R cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. Fig. 25 is an S-S cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. In Fig. 26, (A) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a T-T cross-sectional view of (A), (C) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the second state, and (D) is a U-U cross-sectional view of (C). Fig. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming part showing the movement state of the screw member. Fig. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming part showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in Figures 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1-N2 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and screw members N11, N12, N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3.

In more detail, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached from the rear side toward the front, away from the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen and fall out to the rear due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in Figure 18 is extremely low.

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the rear side toward the front on the outer surface of the upright wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, at a position lower than the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out to the rear due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in Figure 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from above downward to the outer surface of the right side vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and at a position lower than the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw member N15 loosens and falls out upward due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of it falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in Figure 18 is extremely low.

In addition, screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 receive and store game balls supplied by the resupply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and are arranged around the ball tank forming portion 201, which is subjected to the weight of a large number of game balls. Since these are prone to vibration and impact, flanged screw members are used, which have a large contact area with the attached portion and are less likely to loosen.

In addition, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming section 201 are positioned so that they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming section 201 even if they loosen and fall out, i.e., positioned below the top opening of the ball tank forming section 201, thereby preventing the game balls from getting mixed into the ball tank forming section 201, which opens upward to receive and store the game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is positioned adjacent to (or may be abutting) the upper surface of the plate-shaped first protrusion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223, and the gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male thread portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1), so that the screw member is almost never pinched between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 and held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming portion 201.

In addition, the gap L31 formed between the rear of the bottom wall portion 203A of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is longer than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F (L3>L2), so that the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming portion 201.

As shown in Figures 18 and 19 (B), even if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounting portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is inclined downward toward the rear side, so the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, and is unlikely to be retained near the ball tank forming portion 201. This prevents the fallen screw member N15 from getting mixed into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board, causing a break or the like.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 9, 20 and 21(A), the first induction passage forming portion 202 and its periphery are fitted with screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222, a screw member N6 for attaching the board mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, and a screw member N16 for attaching the third cover body 330 to the first induction passage forming portion 202.

In more detail, the screw members N3 to N6 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the first guide path forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the first guide path forming portion 202. Also, the second protrusion 225 of the attachment member 223 is disposed between the attachment position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide path forming portion 202. Therefore, although the attachment position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 is somewhat distant from the first guide path forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side. Therefore, if the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out backward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that they will move backward on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225 and fall into the first guide path forming portion 202 as shown in FIG. 20.

As shown in Figures 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is attached to the mounting member 223 in a mounting hole H3 formed in a position forward away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. In addition, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is linearly extended toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when attaching the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. The groove 227 is formed so that the width tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower, but since the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the rear side, the bottom surface of the groove 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens and falls out backward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko game machine 1, it is highly likely to fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion portion 225 (see FIG. 22 (A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly backward when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is approximately horizontal toward the rear, the screw member N3 is less likely to move backward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202.

All screw members, including screw member N3, are composed of a head NH and a male thread NS, and when dropped onto the flat upper surface of upper wall portion 225A, they often assume a tilted position with the periphery of the head NH and the tip of the male thread NS in contact at two points (see FIG. 22(A)). As a result, when a tilted screw member N3 is subjected to vibration or impact, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male thread NS as if it is swinging its head, changing its orientation, as shown in FIG. 22(B). Therefore, when the screw member N3 falls onto a flat surface other than groove 227 on the upper surface of upper wall portion 225A or deviates from the rear end of groove 227, it may move linearly backwards, or it may move so as to bend to the left or right as the head NH rotates in a swinging manner. That is, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 20, if the vehicle moves backwards and curves to the right, it is likely to fall onto the first cover body 310; if the vehicle moves backwards in a straight line, it is likely to fall onto the second cover body 320; and if the vehicle moves backwards and curves to the left, it is likely to fall onto the horizontal wall 264 in front of the first guide passage.

20 and 21, if the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves backwards, bending to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male thread portion NS crosses the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread portion NS is inserted into one of the long holes 316A to 316C, but the head NH is engaged without falling out, so that the screw member N3 remains on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first induction passage forming portion 202. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C constitute a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming portion 202, from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

Also, as shown in Figures 20 and 21, if the screw member N3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves linearly backward, it is highly likely to fall onto the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in Figure 22 (C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male thread portion NS crosses the grooves 326A to 326C, or a part of the male thread portion NS and the head portion NH are accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, so that the screw member N3 does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and remains on the cover portion 324. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C constitute a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, if the screw member N3 falls onto the horizontal wall 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall 225B of the second protrusion 225 and the first induction passage forming portion 202, it will remain in a tilted state on the horizontal wall 264. In other words, the horizontal wall 264 side is located below the upper end edge of the upper wall 225A and the vertical wall 203B between the rear wall 225B and the first induction passage forming portion 202, and a recess 290 with an open upper side is formed by the upper wall 225A, the vertical wall 203B, and the horizontal wall 264, so that the screw member N3 is accommodated and remains in this recess 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3, which is the periphery of the first induction passage forming portion 202, and the first induction passage forming portion 202, and constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first induction passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

20 and 21, the screw member N13 is attached to a mounting hole H13 formed in the mounting piece 263, which is located forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the first passage forming body 203 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens and falls out rearward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is highly likely to fall into a recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264 (see FIG. 23(A)). In more detail, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, and a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed near the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open upward by the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the material is accommodated and retained in this recess 280.

As shown in Figures 20 and 23(B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls out backwards due to vibration or impact on the pachinko game machine 1, it may fall and become lodged in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 located on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13, which is in the periphery of the first guide path forming portion 202, and the first guide path forming portion 202, and constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the screw member N13 moving toward the first guide path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is attached to a mounting hole H4 formed in the mounting member 223, which is located forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls out backwards due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion portion 225 (see Figure 24).

20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 falls from the upper end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A as shown in Fig. 24, regardless of whether the screw member N4 moves backwards and bends to the right, moves linearly backwards, or moves backwards and bends to the right, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the upper wall portion 211H may enter the interior from the opening 234 and be accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the male screw portion NS may be inserted into the recess 243 formed between the board mounting frame 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, but the head NH may be engaged and not fall out, causing the screw member N4 to be retained. In other words, recesses 242 and 243 are provided between mounting hole H4, which is in the vicinity of first guide passage forming portion 202, and first guide passage forming portion 202, and constitute a special restriction portion for restricting screw member N4 moving toward first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the multiple operating parts 233. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, multiple cables C connected to multiple connection holes 231 hang down from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), and these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating parts 233 and the cables C are provided between the mounting hole H4, which is around the first guide path forming part 202, and the first guide path forming part 202, and constitute a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 moving toward the first guide path forming part 202 from falling into the first guide path forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backwards so as to bend to the right, and then passes over the vertical wall portion 203B, it falls into the first guide path forming portion 202 from the uncovered area 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 at the top opening of the first guide path forming portion 202. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 falls out between the game balls while moving downstream in accordance with the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A, so that it falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the uncovered area 350 in the first guide path forming portion 202 and is discharged outside the first guide path forming portion 202.

Even if the screw member N4 does not fall through any of the holes 271B-271D, it will eventually fall through any of the holes 271A-271H and be discharged outside the first guide path forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A-271H form a specific restriction section for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming section 201 or the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4, moves backwards so as to bend to the left, and then exceeds the vertical wall portion 203B, it falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330, and is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover portion 334 into the first guide path forming portion 202. In other words, the recess 336 constitutes a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334, which is provided so as to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guide path forming portion 202, from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is attached to a mounting hole H6 formed in the board mounting frame 211, located forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens and falls backward due to vibration or impact caused to the pachinko game machine 1, it is highly likely that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see Figure 25).

20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by the multiple ribs 211A extending rearward to move linearly rearward, and then when it moves to turn to the right, it falls into a position near the upstream side of the ball stop member 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 as shown in FIG. 25. As explained in FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (the dispensing device 200 side), so that the screw member N6 that has fallen into a position near the upstream side of the ball stop member 340 on the cover portion 334 is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower side of the incline, and the movement downstream (left side) is restricted, causing the screw member N6 to remain on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 26(A) and (B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is open, and the screw member N6 can be retained in a space surrounded by the wall portion that is approximately U-shaped in plan view and is made up of the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C, so that the screw member N6 can be held without falling off the cover portion 334. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 26(C) and (D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D, so that the screw member N6 can be held without falling off the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is simply arranged to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6, whose movement is restricted, may fall backward or forward. In contrast, in the first state, the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6, whose movement is restricted, are covered by the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C, so that the screw member N6 can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side of the screw member N6, whose movement is restricted. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portion 334 in the inclination direction, and constitutes a specific portion that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 at the cover portion 334.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is attached to the mounting hole H5 formed in the mounting member 223, which is located on the front right side of the downstream portion of the first induction passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. However, the first induction passage forming portion 202 is not located directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens and falls backward due to vibration or impact, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but there is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first induction passage forming portion 202 before reaching the first induction passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first induction passage forming portion 202 and at a position lower than the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens and falls rearward due to vibration or impact, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first induction passage forming portion 202 rather than falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the screw members N3 to N6, etc., provided at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 become loosened and fall out due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and after moving rearward on the upper wall portion 225A due to the vibrations or impacts or the opening and closing of the gaming machine frame 3, they fall onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334. In addition, the long holes 316A-316C, the grooves 326A-326C, the recess 336, and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming section 202, so that the screw member is likely to remain on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 without falling from the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 into the first guide path forming section 202, and therefore it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from moving and being mixed into the dispensing device 200. In addition, since a vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream) end of the long holes 316A-316C and the grooves 326A-326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming section 202.

As shown in FIG. 28, the upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 is covered by the cover sections 314, 324, and 334 except for the uncovered area 350. However, even if a game ball supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 spills over and lands on the upstream cover sections 314 and 324, the front-to-rear dimensions of the long holes 316A-316C and the grooves 326A-326C are narrower than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Therefore, the game ball P rolls to the left and then falls from the left end of the cover section 324 into the uncovered area 350 and is returned to the first guide passage forming section 202.

As a result, not only can game balls that have landed on the cover portions 314, 324 be returned to the first guide path forming portion 202, but it is also possible to prevent the falling screw member N from restricting the space in which it can be retained due to game balls P being retained in the long holes 316A-316C and the recessed grooves 326A-326C, or from coming into contact with the retained game balls and falling from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide path forming portion 202.

In addition, if a game ball falls onto the cover portion 334, it will flow down the cover portion 334 toward the left side and be restricted from flowing down by the ball stopper member 340, or it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, in the long holes 316A-316C as the first retention portion and the recessed grooves 326A-326C as the second retention portion, the recessed groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A-316C, and the front-to-back dimension L22B is larger than the front-to-back dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member becomes more likely to be retained in the retention portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324 can be prevented from moving and falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

On the other hand, if the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration or impact and fall from the non-covered area 350 provided between the cover parts 324 and 334 into the first guide path forming part 202, or if, like the screw member N4, it moves backward on the upper wall part 225A and then falls directly from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202, it will move downstream as the game balls P flow down in the first guide path forming part 202, slip out between the game balls, and approach the bottom wall part 203A, and fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged outside the first guide path forming part 202. This prevents the screw members that have fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 from moving and getting mixed into the payout device 200.

The multiple holes 271A-271H formed in the bottom wall 203A are formed from the midstream (near the meandering section 273) to the downstream in the first guide passage forming section 202, and there is an area where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in a position close to the ball tank forming section 201 and the most upstream hole 271A of the holes 271A-271H. In this way, by forming an area where multiple holes are not formed in the upstream section of the first guide passage forming section 202, it is possible to preferably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall 203A near the upstream section of the first guide passage forming section 202, where ball pressure is applied when game balls from the ball tank forming section 201 flow down in a vertically stacked state.

In addition, by forming an area in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, it is possible to appropriately prevent the screw member that has fallen from the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the interior of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation hole 220B (see Figure 6) formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to areas in the first guide path forming section 202 where no holes are formed, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming section 202, and also to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 without falling outside the first guide path forming section 202.

In addition, the largest hole 271H among the multiple holes 271A-271H is located at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be dropped conveniently from the hole 271H outside the first guide path forming section 202, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from being mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming section 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming section 202, the balls are stacked vertically in the ball tank forming section 201 and the non-covered area 350, so the screw member is often located above the game balls. However, the hole 271H is located downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover section 334, that is, it is located in a position where the game balls are straightened in a single vertical layer, so the screw member is likely to fall into the hole 271H. This makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming section 202 from entering the payout device 200.

In addition, at least some of the holes 271B-271D among the multiple holes 271B-271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the first induction passage forming portion 202, so that even if a screw member enters the first induction passage forming portion 202 from the non-coated area 350, it can be dropped out of the first induction passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B-271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E-271H among the multiple holes 271B-271H are provided closer to the payout device 200 than the uncovered area 350 in the first guide path forming section 202. Therefore, even if a game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide path forming section 202 does not reach the holes 271B-271D as described above, the game ball will move downward as it flows downward and is more likely to fall from the holes 271E-271H, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

As shown in Figures 22(C), 23(A)(B), and 24, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are provided below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the mounting portion, and serve as special retention sections that can retain the screw members N3 to N6 moving toward the first induction path forming section 202 before they reach the first induction path forming section 202. The screw members N3 to N6 that have come out of the mounting holes H3 to H6 but have not come into the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 can move toward the cover sections 314, 324, and 334, thereby preventing the screw members N3 to N6 that have come out of the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first induction path forming section 202.

In addition, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed, a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes, so that the screw members N3 to N6 that are stuck in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 can be easily removed.

In addition, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the long holes 316A-316C, the grooves 326A-326C, and recess 336 not only prevent (or hinder) the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also act as retention portions that can retain the screw member outside the first guide path forming portion 202, making it possible for an amusement arcade staff member to find the screw member when inspecting the game, making it easier to identify which screw member has come loose, and making it easier to take measures to prevent the screw member from getting into the payout device 200.

The ball stopper member 340 as a specific part can be changed between a first state in which the rotating part 341 is in an upright position and the front wall part 341A is deviated upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a second state in which the rotating part 341 is in a tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 to be able to contact the game ball, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide path forming part 204. When the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to remain than when it is in the first state, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 can be prevented from entering the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stopping member 340 is in the second state when game balls are removed from the first or second guide passage, that is, when the arcade staff inspects or performs maintenance on the pachinko game machine 1, whereas the ball stopping member 340 is in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the arcade staff cannot monitor it, and therefore in such a state it is possible to effectively prevent the screw member from becoming mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at multiple points by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as an anti-loosening portion, and the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached at a position lower than the upper edge of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 so that they will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the ball tank forming portion 201 are prone to loosening due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, they are made to be flanged screw members to make them less likely to come off the game machine frame 3, while the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide path forming portion 202 will fall outside the first guide path forming portion 202 even if they come off, so it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the payout device 200.

In addition, among the multiple screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a certain screw member (e.g., screw member N12) near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also used as a screw member for attaching an earth wire (e.g., earth wire 226), thereby reducing the number of screw members (number of parts) and preventing a screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200. Note that, instead of an earth wire, the screw member may also be used as a screw member for attaching a certain component other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to a metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, which allows the ball tank forming portion 201 to be attached firmly and reduces the risk of vibration, thereby effectively preventing the screw members from loosening.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide path forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members with a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Therefore, even if the screw members fall into the first guide path forming portion 202, they can be easily dropped through the holes 271A to 271H, preventing the screw members from becoming mixed into the payout device 200.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide path forming section 202 on the game board 2 that can be attached and detached to the game machine frame 3, an inclined surface (e.g., the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can cause the fallen screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 is provided with a gap from the first guide path forming section 202, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 from bouncing back into the first guide path forming section 202 again.

Although not specifically shown, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are arranged so that they do not protrude rearward beyond the rear wall of the cover body 220, and any screw members that fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 are guided to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that fall onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A located below.

The cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12 provided on the rear side of the game board 2, and a plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that dissipate heat generated from these drive sources are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). These heat dissipation holes 220B are preferably large enough to allow the male threaded portion NS of the screw member to be inserted, but at least the head NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since the upper wall portion 220H located directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202 is highly likely to have the screw member fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, it is preferable that the heat dissipation holes 220B are formed at least in a position in the upper wall portion 220H that does not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or are formed in a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). This prevents the screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and causing adverse effects on the image display device 5, the performance device having a movable body, the performance control board 12, etc.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29(A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover part.

In the above embodiment, the guide path forming section that forms the guide path that guides the game balls from the ball tank forming section 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide path forming section 202 that extends so as to incline downward toward the left side, and a second guide path forming section 204 that extends downward from the left end of the lower side of the first guide path forming section 202. The cover section 334 of the third cover body 330 that is provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide path forming section 202 has a ball stopper member 340 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the left end as shown in FIG. 16, so that the screw member N moving to the left on the cover section 334 can be received and retained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left end 360R of the cover section 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves downward toward the second guide path forming section 204, as in the cover section 360 of this modified example 1.

By doing this, when the game ball P or screw member N that has fallen onto the cover portion 360 moves toward the left end side, it does not remain on the cover portion 360 but falls directly from the left end of the first guide path forming portion 202 outside the first guide path forming portion 202, thereby preventing the screw member N from getting mixed into the payout device 200.

Also, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, a cable CH may be provided in a position adjacent to the recess 361 in the cover portion 360 so as to cross the flow direction of the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing this, the screw member N and the game ball P that are stuck in the recess 361 but may move due to the tilt can be kept stuck there by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
For example, in the above embodiment, screw members N1-6 and N11-16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame constituting the gaming island, and screw members (not shown) for attaching various devices (e.g., the supply device 150, etc.) arranged inside the gaming island to the frame, etc. are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all screw members such as screw members that remain in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during the manufacture of the gaming machine or during maintenance at the gaming parlor, can be targeted, but it is preferable that at least screw members that are previously attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which a ball tank forming section 201 formed in a box shape with an open top by a bottom wall section 203A and a vertical wall section B was used as a storage section capable of storing game media, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage section can store game balls, it does not have to have a longer front-to-back dimension than the first guide passage forming section 202 like the ball tank forming section 201, and it may have a front-to-back dimension that is approximately the same as or shorter than the first guide passage forming section 202. Also, as long as it is capable of receiving game balls supplied from the refill device 150, the top does not necessarily have to be open.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls using a rotatable sprocket was applied as a payout section capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a payout device capable of paying out game balls using a member other than a sprocket may also be used.

In the above embodiment, the first guide path forming section 202 is formed as a groove with an open top by a bottom wall section 203A and a vertical wall section 203B as a guide path forming section that has an open top and forms a guide path that guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide path forming section may be made of a cylindrical member with an opening formed in part of the top surface, and the shape, size, etc. may be changed in various ways. Furthermore, the width dimension (front-to-back dimension) may be approximately the same as or larger than the ball tank forming section 201, and the ball tank forming section may guide the game balls to flow down in multiple rows.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which the ball tank forming section 201 as a storage section capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage forming section 202, which has an open top and forms a first guide passage that guides the game balls in the ball tank forming section 201 to the payout device 200, are molded as one piece, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming section 201 and the first guide passage forming section 202 may be formed as one piece by assembling separate members with a screw member or the like. In this case, the screw member that assembles the ball tank forming section 201 and the first guide passage forming section 202 also falls within the scope of the screw member of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, a screw member may be introduced through the top opening of the first guide path forming section 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. The screw member may be introduced through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side of the first guide path forming section 202. In addition, if the screw member may be introduced into the second guide path forming section 204, a predetermined limiting section for limiting the screw member from falling into the second guide path forming section 204, or a specific limiting section for limiting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the second guide path forming section 204 to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are used as cover parts provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming section 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover parts.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the cover portion that covers a portion of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming portion 202 may be formed of a separate member from the first induction passage forming portion 202, or may be formed integrally with the first induction passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first induction passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a rectangular tube shape.

In the above embodiment, the long holes 316A-316C as holes capable of retaining the screw member on the cover portion, and the grooves 326A-326C and the recess 336 as recesses are used as predetermined restricting portions for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the screw member from falling from the cover portion, a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member on the cover portion, or a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the fall or movement may be not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, or an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member.

In other words, the specified restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 need not only be something that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also something that can make it difficult for the screw member to fall.

In the above embodiment, a form in which a plurality of holes 271A to 271H are applied as a specific limiting portion provided in the first guide path forming portion 202 to limit the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 toward the payout device 200 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movement limiting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 toward the payout device 200 side may be used. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement toward the payout device 200 side, not only a convex portion or a concave portion but also a magnet that can attract a metal screw member or an adhesive portion that can adhere to the screw member may be used, and these are preferably provided in a position that does not affect the flow of the game balls (for example, a portion that does not come into contact with the game balls, such as a corner between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide path forming section 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is not necessarily limited to a section that prevents the screw member that has entered the first guide path forming section 202 from moving toward the dispensing device 200, but may be any section that makes it difficult for the screw member to move, as long as it can restrict the movement of the screw member toward the dispensing device 200.

In addition, if the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the payout device 200 is restricted (restricted, hindered) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guide path forming section 202, the flow of the game balls down is also restricted by the screw member that is stuck in the first guide path due to the restricted movement, and there is a high possibility that ball jamming will occur. If ball jamming occurs, as described above, a supply error notification is executed, and it is highly likely that a store clerk at the game arcade will open the game machine frame 3 and visually inspect the ball tank forming section 201 on the back and the state of the game balls in the first guide path forming section 202. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 and is stuck in the first guide path forming section 202, it becomes easier for the store clerk to identify that the cause of the ball jam was the screw member, and it becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which all of the multiple holes 271A-271H are large enough to allow the screw member to drop through them has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as at least two of the multiple holes 271A-271H are formed to allow the screw member to drop through them, the other holes do not need to allow the screw member to drop through them. Furthermore, the shape and size of the multiple holes 271A-271H are arbitrary and can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above configuration.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 are used as the first board that is attached below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a terminal board 210 is used as the second board that is attached at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 as the first board are illustrated as being attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21 through the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above various boards as the first board may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without going through the board case.

In the above embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 as the first board are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which the boards are stored using screw members N20 and N21, that is, by a mounting method using screw members, and the terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as a mounting means different from the screw members, that is, by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a locking means such as a latch member, a mounting means such as a rivet pin, or an adhesive means such as an adhesive.

In the above embodiment, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are provided around the first induction passage forming portion 202 as special restricting portions for restricting the screw member moving toward the first induction passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the screw member from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202, a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member toward the first induction passage forming portion 202, or a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall outside the first induction passage forming portion 202. In addition, the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the fall or movement into the first induction passage forming portion 202 may be not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, or an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member.

In other words, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the loosened screw member into the first guide passage forming portion 202 need only be something that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also something that can make it difficult for the screw member to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restriction portion (fall inhibition portion), or a concave portion or hole portion as a movement restriction portion (movement inhibition portion) may be provided at a predetermined position on the upper wall portion 225A, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as the special limiting portion are provided is illustrated as being in the vicinity of the front vertical wall portion 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is at least between the mounting portion (mounting hole) where the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming portion, it does not necessarily have to be in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B, and for example, it may be provided in a position between the mounting portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion, closer to the mounting portion than the guide passage forming portion.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a ball stopping member 340 that can be changed between a first state that allows the game balls of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down and a second state that makes it difficult or impossible for them to flow down is applied as a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 on the cover portion 334 side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the part is provided on the payout device 200 side (the lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 in the inclined direction, it may be a convex part, a vertical wall part, a wiring holder, etc. that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopping function.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a specific part, the ball stop member 340, is provided on the dispensing device 200 side of the cover part 334 in the inclined direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. The specific part may be provided on the dispensing device 200 side end of the cover parts 314, 324 as long as it is provided on the dispensing device 200 side end of one cover part.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed as part of the member that configures the cover part 334.

In the above embodiment, the flange portion F (washer) that is larger in diameter than the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and is formed integrally with the head NH is used as an example of an anti-loosening portion, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the flange portion F, a washer that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or a rotation prevention portion for the head NH or an adhesive that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH or the flange portion F (washer) may be used. In addition, the screw member may be not only one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and may include members such as screws and bolts that come off from the attached part when loosened.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at multiple points by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F which is an anti-loosening portion, and the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are illustrated as being attached at a position lower than the upper edge of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 so that they will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if they are attached at a position higher than the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, as long as they are attached at a non-directly above position horizontally shifted from the directly above position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, the screw members can be prevented from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the dropped screw member may be guided by a predetermined guide portion (e.g., a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) so as to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the predetermined restriction section, specific restriction section, special restriction section, and specific section in the above embodiment are exemplified as being forms that restrict or regulate (hinder) the movement of not only the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also screw members other than the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the game island, toward the payout device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is preferable that the size and shape are formed to be able to restrict or regulate (hinder) the movement of at least the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and further the screw members N3-N6 attached at a position above the first guide passage forming section 202 and the ball tank forming section 201, toward the payout device 200.

(Feature part 053SG)
Next, a description will be given of an embodiment of a gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG according to the present invention with reference to FIG. 30-1 to FIG. 30-24.

The gaming machine in characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that is installed in an amusement parlor or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with a gaming control board equipped with a gaming control microcomputer that controls the game. Note that the gaming machine described below can be the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, and the gaming control board can be the main board 11 in the above embodiment, and the presentation control board can be the presentation control board 12.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to multiple input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input status according to the progress of the game. Examples of input components include detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that identify the position of movable objects used in the game such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the player's advantage, and detection switches that detect the opening of doors and abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and input data that specifies the detection status of the input signals from the input components by the input circuit is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to multiple output components such as displays, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Examples of output components include displays that display according to the lottery results, displays that display the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, displays that instruct the player on how to operate, displays that display the value owned by the player, LEDs that show the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of abnormalities, motors that operate moving parts used in the game such as reels and variable winning devices, and solenoids.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to a corresponding output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer controls the output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

The game control microcomputer is connected to the input circuit and the output circuit via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit via a shared data bus.

In addition, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus; some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuits to the game control microcomputer without going through the shared data bus.

All output circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits may be connected directly to the game control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through a shared data bus.

The data bus is also connected to an external output terminal, so that the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to an external device as an external output signal, and the external device can use the output data output as an external output signal to inspect the performance of the game machine, etc.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the gaming control board in Example 1 will be described. The gaming control board has electronic components mounted on one side and no electronic components mounted on the other side, where the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. In the following, the side on which the electronic components are mounted will be referred to as the mounting side, and the side on which the electronic components are not mounted and where the terminals of the electronic components are soldered will be referred to as the solder side.

Figure 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in Figures 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board is rectangular with a pair of short sides extending vertically and a pair of long sides extending horizontally, and is made of an insulating printed board. In addition, the game control board has a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a plurality of wiring patterns made of conductors are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, in the area where the wiring patterns are not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, an insulating area made of an insulator and a ground area made of a conductor and constituting a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area except the area where the wiring patterns and insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, the mounting surface has more vertically extending wiring patterns than horizontally extending wiring patterns, while the solder surface has more horizontally extending wiring patterns than vertically extending wiring patterns, as shown in Figure 30-3. As a result, the vertically extending wiring patterns are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the horizontally extending wiring patterns are concentrated on the solder surface, minimizing the need for designs that require detouring wiring patterns when vertically and horizontally extending wiring patterns intersect.

Also, as shown in Figure 30-3, the wiring patterns arranged on the solder side often have wires that extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance of the wiring patterns is often longer than that of the wiring patterns arranged on the mounting side. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are only mounted on the mounting side, and not on the solder side, so that the relatively long wiring patterns arranged on the solder side are not obstructed by the electronic components.

In addition, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface via a through hole, so that the branching occurs without having to detour one of the branched wiring patterns or intersecting one of the branched wiring patterns with the other wiring pattern on the same surface.

Figure 30-4 shows the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment with the input circuit and output circuit mounted on it.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components with one or more rows of terminals consisting of multiple terminals lined up in one direction. Most of the electronic components with these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, the mounting surface has a high proportion of wiring patterns that extend vertically, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction, so that the wiring patterns extending vertically can be connected directly to the terminal rows lined up in the horizontal direction without changing the direction.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit and output circuit, among the electronic components with terminal rows, are formed in a rectangular shape, have a concave notch on one of the short sides, and have a model number printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be identified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from right to left, so that it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number.

Figure 30-5 shows the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder side of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-6 shows the wiring pattern branching off from the data bus on the mounting side of the game control board in this embodiment.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending horizontally on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-5, it is made up of eight wiring patterns formed to extend horizontally from through holes to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side of the game control board are connected to the right side. The data bus and electronic components such as the input circuit and output circuit are connected by wiring patterns formed to branch out through the through holes to the mounting surface side and extend vertically in the up-down direction, as shown in Figure 30-6.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated laterally via a data bus in this way, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are first connected to the data bus on the solder surface extending laterally, and then branch off through through holes at the positions where the electronic components are mounted to wiring patterns on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic components, and are then connected to the electronic components. This eliminates the need to detour around the wiring patterns branching off from the data bus, and allows efficient connection of the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring patterns constituting the data bus are formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components, and furthermore, since the data bus and electronic components are connected by wiring patterns branching off to the mounting surface side through through holes, the wiring patterns on the mounting surface side are shorter, and are less susceptible to noise from the electronic components between them.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring pattern extending in the horizontal direction that constitutes the data bus is not formed in a straight line, but is divided into multiple wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern is formed shorter than the antenna length (λ (bus clock)/2) at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used to transmit data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. Therefore, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is prevented from emitting unintended radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if it is 1/2 the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board, so the length (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern is formed to a length that is not 1/2 the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock, and it is prevented from emitting radio waves due to strong resonance caused by reflection on the surface of the board.

Although the bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and oscillator implemented, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock with the highest expected frequency, and is formed to be a length that is not 1/2 the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock with the highest expected frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted with a bus clock with a frequency lower than the highest expected frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns that make up the data bus are connected to each other via a wiring pattern that extends diagonally to the right or left, i.e., in a direction different from the direction of the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns. In addition, the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns and the diagonally right or left wiring patterns are connected by bending at an obtuse angle. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent parts of the wiring patterns.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the wiring patterns are branched out to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface side (the wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6) through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring patterns that connect the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns, and the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched out using the diagonal wiring patterns that connect the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns.

In the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into multiple wiring patterns, and the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns are connected to each other by a diagonal wiring pattern formed on the same solder surface. However, the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns may be connected to each other by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, that is, the horizontal wiring patterns may be formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at the point where it switches from the solder surface or mounting surface to the other surface, and by using such a configuration, it is possible to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus without detouring the wiring pattern after branching or crossing on the same surface.

Figure 30-7 shows the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-8 shows the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in Figures 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed on almost the entire mounting surface and soldering surface of the gaming control board, except for the areas where the wiring pattern and insulating area are formed. The ground area formed on the gaming control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated by an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the area on the left side of the gaming control board, and the second ground area is formed in the area on the right side of the gaming control board.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-7, electronic components (low-voltage components) to which wiring patterns that transmit low-voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this embodiment) signals, such as a game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit, are connected are mounted in the left area where the first ground area is formed, and the ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns that transmit high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as a drive circuit for operating a motor or solenoid, are connected are mounted in the right area where the second ground area is formed, and the ground terminals of the high-voltage components are connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high-voltage components to the low-voltage components through the ground area. In addition, since the first and second ground areas are formed on the opposing sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, so that even if a temporary potential difference occurs between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor prevents current from flowing from one ground area to the other.

As shown in Fig. 30-7 and Fig. 30-8, an insulating region where no wiring pattern is formed between the first and second ground regions is formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, so that the first and second ground regions are electrically isolated from each other. Furthermore, the first and second ground regions on the mounting surface and the first and second ground regions on the solder surface are formed to overlap, and the insulating region separating the first and second ground regions on the mounting surface and the insulating region separating the first and second ground regions on the solder surface are also formed to overlap, so that even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface to the other surface of the solder surface, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Figure 30-10 shows the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-11 shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-12 shows the game control board in this embodiment stored in the board case.

As shown in Figure 30-10, the game control board has multiple connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the bottom edge of the mounting surface for connecting wiring from outside the game control board. The wiring from the game control board includes wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the game's advantage, such as a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal for transitioning to a changeable state a set value that determines the player's advantage, such as the lottery probability, a signal for changing the set value, a signal for displaying information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting a detection signal for an error release operation, and wiring as a backup power supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, i.e., the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, but as shown in FIG. 30-11, they are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, i.e., the surface opposite the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors, such as the connector number, is printed around the mounting parts. Note that the information printed around the mounting parts of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be information about the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, and the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting side through through holes at the ends opposite the side connected to the terminals. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and are provided at locations where the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are first connected to the electronic components. For this reason, it is possible to connect from the solder side to the wiring patterns on the mounting side using the through holes for connecting to the electronic components.

As shown in Figures 30-12 (A) and (B), the gaming control board is attached to the gaming machine while housed in a board case. The board case can be sealed with a one-way screw, a seal, or welding, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving traces. For this reason, by attaching the gaming control board to the gaming machine while housed in the board case, the structure is such that tampering with the gaming control board is prevented.

As shown in Figures 30-12 (A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is stored in it. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed in the area of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the board case, but the wiring pattern is formed to avoid this area. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes that are approximately the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes, allowing wiring from the outside to be connected.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, some gaps will be created around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because they are connected to external wiring. However, the terminals on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, i.e., the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, but are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, i.e., the surface opposite the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, preventing fraudulent acts such as shorting out or breaking the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from around the area where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

The mounting surface is covered with a covering portion of the board case around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7, and no wiring patterns, including those connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7, are formed in the area covered by the covering portion. The wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, so that unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from around the area where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

Figure 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and connected to the power supply input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Vcc (+5V) also branches off from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board and is connected to the charging capacitor via a backflow prevention diode, and the line branching between the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as the driving power source for the game control microcomputer and is charged in the charging capacitor. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power source VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer retains the data stored in the RAM provided in the game control microcomputer by receiving the backup power source VBB. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may also be supplied from a circuit provided in the game control board.

Figure 30-14 is a diagram showing the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder side of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-15 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder side.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, the solder side of the game control board is formed with wiring patterns constituting the power supply line, including wiring patterns Vcc1-3 for supplying normal power and wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power. As shown in FIG. 30-14 and FIG. 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1-3 are composed of wiring patterns formed on the solder side and wiring patterns formed on the mounting side, and are connected to electronic components mounted on the game control board. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-14, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of wiring patterns formed on the solder side. In other words, the wiring pattern VBB is not connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting side, but is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder side. In other words, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder side. For this reason, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, making it less susceptible to external noise and preventing the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-15, a solid ground is formed on the mounting surface in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder side. Therefore, the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder side less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in FIG. 30-15, of the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is formed at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, particularly the wiring patterns used for signal transmission, in the corresponding region on the mounting surface, than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. Therefore, the effect of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring patterns used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface is minimized.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is formed at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring patterns that transmit signals related to the player's interests, such as signals that trigger a lottery, are formed at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns that transmit signals that do not directly relate to the player's history, such as signals that control output components. By forming the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, the influence of noise from the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side on the wiring patterns that transmit signals related to the player's interests is minimized.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit relatively important signals, such as a wiring pattern that transmits a reset signal to the game control microcomputer and a wiring pattern that provides an operating clock to the game control microcomputer, are configured to be formed at positions that have fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than wiring patterns that transmit other signals, thereby minimizing the effect of noise from the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side on the wiring patterns that transmit relatively important signals.

Figure 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which a gaming control board is installed in a slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with gaming components related to gaming, such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance, a reel unit consisting of multiple reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When the gaming control board is installed in the slot machine, the gaming control board is installed so that the mounting surface side, i.e., the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is positioned on the gaming components side. This configuration reduces the effect of noise emitted from the gaming components on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied.

Figure 30-17 shows an example of a situation in which a gaming control board is attached to a pachinko gaming machine. When pachinko gaming machines are installed in an amusement facility, they are often installed with their backs facing other gaming devices, such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the gaming control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the gaming control board is attached so that the mounting surface side, i.e., the surface opposite the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is positioned on the other gaming device side. This configuration reduces the effect of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied.

(Effect 1)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the ratio of wiring patterns extending in a first direction (vertical direction) is greater than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in a second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction in the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, and the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) is greater than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) in the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface. According to this configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that it is possible to minimize designs such as detouring the wiring patterns when the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) cross each other.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized by its rectangular shape consisting of a pair of sides (left and right sides) extending in a first direction (up and down) and a pair of sides (top and bottom sides) extending in a second direction (left and right). With this configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed efficiently along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components having a terminal row consisting of multiple terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (left-right direction). With this configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is rectangular with a pair of short sides (left and right sides) extending in a first direction (up-down direction) and a pair of long sides (top and bottom sides) extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. With this configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction), which may be longer, on the solder surface without being obstructed by the electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from wiring pattern 1 to wiring pattern 2, one of the two wiring patterns at the branched end is formed on the mounting surface, and the other wiring pattern is formed on the solder surface. With this configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branched end or to intersect one of the wiring patterns at the branched end with the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be formed preferably.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a first terminal (a terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (a terminal of an input circuit and an output circuit) spaced apart in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected to form a specific wiring pattern (data bus) used to transmit a specific signal (input data, output data), the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing it into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and each of the straight wiring patterns extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is formed to be shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). According to this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight-line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and each of the straight-line wiring patterns extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is formed to be shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). This prevents the specific wiring pattern (data bus) from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and prevents unintended emission of radio waves.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight-line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected to each other by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). With this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight-line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment is configured such that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected to each other by a wiring pattern extending in a direction different (diagonal) from the specific direction (left-right direction), but it may also be configured such that wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are formed alternately on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a specific wiring pattern (data bus) branches into a wiring pattern different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern that extend in a specific direction (left and right direction). With this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing the space between the one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern that extend in a specific direction.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is formed to be shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as the bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). With this configuration, the length of the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted at a frequency below the maximum frequency.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4) of the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). With this configuration, the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance does not occur due to reflection from the surface of the board, preventing unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected and a second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is connected are mounted, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to a first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to this configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part (insulating area), so that unintended current can be prevented from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is transmitted is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating section. However, in a configuration in which the difference in current flowing through the wiring pattern connecting the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component may be connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component may be connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating section. With such a configuration, even if the difference in current flowing through the wiring pattern connecting the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that unintended current backflow through the ground can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. With this configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground area to the other.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a first ground area is formed on one side (left side) and a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite the first side, with a first electronic component (low voltage component) mounted in the first ground area and a second electronic component (high voltage component) mounted in the second ground area. With this configuration, the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, respectively, so that they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) where no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the insulation between the first ground area and the second ground area.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured so that a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. However, even if a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the insulation between the first ground area and the second ground area can be improved.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the first and second ground areas on the mounting surface and the first and second ground areas on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the mounting surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. With this configuration, even if a temporary potential difference occurs from one side of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other side, they can be prevented from interfering with each other.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is mounted on the game machine while housed in a board case, and the mounting surface is equipped with connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from outside the game control board, and the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface. With this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface, not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) includes wiring related to the game's advantage (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for transitioning to a state in which the set value can be changed, signals for changing the set value, signals for displaying information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, etc.). This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts related to the game's advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) about the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. With this configuration, the terminals of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and since no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface, by displaying information (connector number) about the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) in this area, the part of the mounting surface where no wiring pattern is formed can be effectively utilized.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the board case has a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering portion. With this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or breaking the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the area where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface at the points where they are first connected to the electronic components. With this configuration, the through holes for connecting to the electronic components can be used to connect to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface.

(Effect 5)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a memory means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, the game control microcomputer can retain the memory contents of the memory means (RAM) by a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which no electronic components are mounted, so there is no need to form it around the electronic components, and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, making it less susceptible to noise from the outside, and preventing the data stored in the memory means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized by being attached so that the mounting surface side is located on the side of the game components related to the game (such as the liquid crystal display and the performance control board that controls the performance). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is located on the side of another game device (another game machine). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other game devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a solid ground is formed in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area on the solder surface where the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided. With this configuration, the solid ground formed on the mounting surface can block noise from the mounting surface side.

The gaming control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer has fewer intersections with wiring patterns that transmit signals in the corresponding areas on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns (Vcc1-3) that supply other power sources. This configuration makes it possible to prevent as much as possible the effects of noise from the wiring patterns that transmit signals on the mounting surface side.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and it goes without saying that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls the game, but the configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to other boards mounted on the gaming machine, such as a board that controls the presentation, a board that controls the allocation of game media and game value, and even a board that relays boards together.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in Example 1, the game control board has electronic components mounted on one side and no electronic components mounted on the other side, with the terminals of the electronic components soldered thereto. Note that the basic configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is the same as that of the game control board in Example 1, and here, the configuration that differs from that of the game control board in Example 1 will be mainly described.

Figure 30-18 shows the mounting side of the game control board in Example 1, and Figure 30-19 shows the solder side of the game control board in this example.

As shown in Figures 30-18 and 30-19, the gaming control board is rectangular with a pair of short sides extending vertically and a pair of long sides extending horizontally, and is made of an insulating printed circuit board. The gaming control board also has multiple through holes formed therein, and the mounting surface and soldering surface of the gaming control board have multiple wiring patterns formed thereon to appropriately connect the through holes. Insulating areas and ground areas are formed in the areas of the mounting surface and soldering surface of the gaming control board where no wiring patterns are formed.

The game control board in Example 2 also has input and output circuits mounted thereon, similar to the game control board in Example 1, and these input and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, have a concave notch on one of the short sides, and have a model number printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be identified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number.

Figure 30-20 shows the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder side of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-21 shows the wiring pattern branching off from the data bus on the mounting side of the game control board in this embodiment.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending horizontally on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. 30-20, it is made up of eight wiring patterns formed to extend horizontally from through holes to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side of the game control board are connected to the right side. The data bus and the input and output circuits are connected by wiring patterns formed to branch out through the through holes to the mounting surface side and extend vertically in the up-down direction, as shown in FIG. 30-21.

When connecting the game control microcomputer to the input circuit and output circuit separated in the horizontal direction through a data bus in this way, the terminal of the game control microcomputer is first connected to the data bus on the solder surface extending in the horizontal direction, and at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches through a through hole to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. Therefore, there is no need to detour the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and output circuit separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and further, since the data bus and the input circuit and output circuit are connected by the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short, and it is less susceptible to noise from electronic components in between.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a location closer to the game control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus, so that noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the top edge of the figure, and the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed in an area toward the bottom edge of the game control board in the figure, that is, an area toward the other side opposite the side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. This ensures a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits between the data bus and connectors CN10 to CN17, which input and output signals from and to electronic components outside the game control board.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board is equipped with a first input circuit that detects input of an input signal from a first input part (such as a detection signal from a sensor or switch that does not trigger a lottery) that is relatively less important among the input parts used to control the game, a second input circuit that detects input of an input signal from a second input part that is more important than the first input part (such as a detection signal from a sensor or switch that triggers a lottery, or a detection signal that changes a set value that determines the degree of advantage), a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output part such as a solenoid or motor that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data from the game control microcomputer, a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output part such as various displays or LEDs that display according to the progress of the game based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that is mounted on the game control board and displays the performance of the game machine, such as the payout rate when playing for a certain period of time, based on output data from the game control microcomputer.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data and output data are transmitted via the data bus.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches off to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations and is connected to the wiring pattern formed vertically on the mounting side. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched off to the mounting side through a through hole at position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Also, the wiring pattern branched off to the mounting side through a through hole at position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Also, the wiring pattern branched off to the mounting side through a through hole at positions O and P in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Also, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through a through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit, and branches off on the mounting side, with some of the wiring patterns being connected directly to the external output terminal, and the remaining wiring patterns are connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole once at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure, and then connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, of the input circuits and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuits are connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuits. This makes the input data used to control the game less susceptible to the effects of noise, etc.

Also, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the multiple output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which could affect the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the multiple output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to an indicator (second output component) that displays information according to the progress of the game other than the performance indicator. This makes it difficult to tamper with the content of the performance display by arranging unauthorized components, etc.

As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole at position Q in the figure, is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs output according to the progress of the game, and also branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. In this way, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through a through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface is used to branch into a wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit to perform output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side, and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side to branch into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, may be connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs output according to the progress of the game, and may be branched on the mounting surface, with the branched wiring pattern being connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with this configuration, by using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through a through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to branch into a wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side and a wiring pattern connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device, there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side to branch into each of the wiring patterns connected to the multiple output circuits, and the wiring pattern is formed simply.

Of the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus, and input data is transmitted directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is first connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through a through hole at position T in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through a through hole at position U in the figure, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit, which detects the input of an input signal from the first input part, which is relatively less important among the input parts used to control the game, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus, while the second input circuit, which detects the input of an input signal from the second input part, which is more important than the first input part, is not connected to the data bus, but is connected directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. Therefore, input data based on the input signal from the second input part is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus over which input data from other input circuits and output data to output circuits are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits and output data to output circuits.

(Effect 6)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a data bus is formed for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, and the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to this configuration, the input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, so that the input data can be prevented from being affected by noise, etc.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment is configured so that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit, but the output circuit may also be configured so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit.By configuring in this way, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit that transmits input data to the game control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer, so that the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise, etc.

The game control board of this embodiment is formed with a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, and the output circuit includes a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output part that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output part that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to this configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output part that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, so that it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which affects the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment is configured so that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit, but the second output circuit may also be configured so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit.With such a configuration, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs a display according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game, so it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which would affect the display according to the progress of the game.

In addition, as in the game control board of Example 1, when a first ground area in which low-voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a second ground area in which high-voltage components are mounted is formed on the right side, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is often a high-voltage component and is therefore mounted in the second ground area, and the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs a display according to the progress of the game is often a low-voltage component and is therefore mounted in the first ground area. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and by mounting the second output circuit in the first ground area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, and it is possible to prevent a load from being placed on the second output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a data bus is formed that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected to the data bus through a through hole is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for outputting an output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. With this configuration, the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected through a through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for outputting an output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device, so there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side to branch into each of these wiring patterns, and the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game control board of this embodiment is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, and includes a first input circuit that transmits input data to the game control microcomputer based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer, a second input circuit that transmits input data to the game control microcomputer based on an input signal from a second input component used to control the game control microcomputer, and a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output output signals to the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and is characterized in that the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus, and the second input circuit is connected to the game control microcomputer without via the data bus. With this configuration, input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without passing through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted, so input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. This configuration makes it possible to prevent noise from the electronic components from affecting the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus and the input and output circuits are connected by a wiring pattern that branches out through holes to the mounting surface opposite the solder surface on which the data bus is formed. With this configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input and output circuits is shortened, reducing the effects of noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that connectors (connectors CN10-CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (top side), and the data bus is formed in an area closer to the other side (bottom side) of the game control board that faces the one side. With this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10-CN17) and the data bus, making effective use of the board area.

The gaming control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other displays. With this configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other displays, making it difficult to tamper with the display content by arranging unauthorized components, etc.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted with different component orientations. With this configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily understood.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the effect of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those in the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modified examples given for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has electronic components mounted on one side and no electronic components mounted on the other side, with the terminals of the electronic components soldered to it. The game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the electronic components mounted and the structure of the through holes, and the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described here.

Figure 30-23 is an oblique view showing the structure of a specific electronic component mounted on a game control board in Example 3, where (A) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from above, and (B) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from below.

A specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and at the bottom of the specific electronic component, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B), there are fixing terminals 1 and 2 for the purpose of fixing the specific electronic component to a board and are not used to transmit signals or power of the specific electronic component, and a connection terminal that is connected to the wiring pattern of the board and is used to transmit signals and power of the specific electronic component. In addition, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component, and electronic components having only a connection terminal and no fixing terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through holes and special through holes. As shown in Figure 30-24 (A), normal through holes are copper-plated, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner surface of the through hole, so that the through hole provides electrical conductivity between the mounting surface and the solder surface. On the other hand, special through holes are not copper-plated on the inner surface of the through hole, so that the through hole does not provide electrical conductivity between the mounting surface and the solder surface, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B).

When soldering to a normal through-hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through-hole is copper-plated, so the solder in the through-hole flows up to the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through-hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the through-hole is not copper-plated, so the solder does not flow up inside the through-hole and does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes and the connection terminal into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so the solder does not reach the mounting surface, which prevents problems such as the solder rising too far to the mounting surface side where the specific electronic component is mounted, causing the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 to be hidden by the solder.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that unauthorized replacement of parts will go unnoticed. Also, if the model number is hidden during type testing, the component configuration cannot be identified, which could result in the product failing the test and not being approved. Also, if the model number cannot be confirmed when installing the product in an amusement facility, there is a risk that the product will not be allowed to be installed in the amusement facility. However, such problems can be prevented by fixing a terminal with the model number printed or engraved on the top to a specific through-hole.

On the other hand, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used to transmit signals or power for a specific electronic component, so there is no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldered to a specific through-hole. On the other hand, the connection terminals are normally inserted into through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so the solder reaches the mounting surface, ensuring a reliable electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, the plurality of electronic components are fixed by inserting terminals into through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface and soldering the through holes and the terminals, and a specific through hole is formed to fix a specific electronic component among the plurality of electronic components, and the specific through hole is characterized in that the mounting surface and the solder surface are not conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is not conductive between the mounting surface and the solder surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so that when soldering, the solder rises too much to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted, which can be prevented from causing a malfunction.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the fixing terminals (fixing terminals 1, 2) of the specific electronic components are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. With this configuration, since it is the fixing terminals (fixing terminals 1, 2) of the specific electronic components that are soldered to the specific through holes, there is no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak because the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In addition, the game control board in this embodiment is configured so that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted and soldered into the specific through holes, but it may also be configured so that the terminals for transmitting the signals and power of the specific electronic component (connection terminals) are inserted and soldered into the specific through holes. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent malfunctions such as the solder rising too far to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted, causing the terminals for transmitting the signals and power of the specific electronic component to short out with other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). This configuration prevents the solder from rising too far up onto the mounting surface where the electronic component is mounted, thereby hiding the model number of the specific electronic unit.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Furthermore, the modified examples given for the first and second embodiments can also be applied to the third embodiment.

(Feature 053SG Invention)
As described above, the characteristic part 053SG includes the invention described below. In other words, conventionally, as described in, for example, JP 2016-93428 A, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, and for this type of board, a board has been proposed that uses a single data bus to input and output data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic devices. In this type of board, various issues exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of characteristic part 053SG (1) is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The game device comprises a control means (game control microcomputer), an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that to the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used to control the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means, thereby preventing the input data from being affected by noise, etc.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (2) is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on a first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on a second surface (solder surface).
This feature makes it possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (3) is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches through holes to the surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (4) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (top side) of the board, and the data bus is formed in an area near the other side (bottom side) of the board (game control board) that faces the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, thereby making it possible to effectively utilize the board area.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (5) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) which outputs an output signal to the performance display device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit (second output circuit) which outputs an output signal to another display device.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuits that output output signals to other display devices, making it difficult to tamper with the display content by, for example, placing unauthorized components.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (6) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate in such a way that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (7) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (8) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The game device comprises a control means (game control microcomputer), an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit includes a first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a second electronic component (second output component) that performs a display in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that to the second output circuit (second output circuit).
According to this feature, the first output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game, is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays in accordance with the progress of the game. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (9) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The game device comprises a control means (game control microcomputer), an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on a first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on a second surface (solder surface), and the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) connected to the data bus via a through hole is branched into a first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting on the first surface (mounting surface) in response to the progress of the game, and a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal in response to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected via a through hole from the data bus formed on the second surface is branched into a first wiring pattern for outputting on the first surface side according to the progress of the game and a second wiring pattern for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.Therefore, since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the second surface to the first surface side to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (10) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The game device comprises a control means (game control microcomputer), an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
a first input circuit (first input circuit) that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), a second input circuit (second input circuit) that transmits input data based on an input signal from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, input data based on an input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted, so that input data based on an important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (11) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The game device comprises a control means (game control microcomputer), an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used to control the control means, thereby preventing the output data from being affected by noise, etc.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (12) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The game device comprises a control means (game control microcomputer), an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit includes a first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a second electronic component (second output component) that performs a display in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit).
According to this feature, the second output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display in accordance with the progress of the game, is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that performs operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which would affect the display in accordance with the progress of the game.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Another example of the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and includes a storage section (e.g., ball tank forming section 201) that can store gaming media (e.g., gaming balls P), a payout section (e.g., payout device 200) that can pay out gaming media, and a guide path forming section (e.g., first guide path forming section 202 and second guide path forming section 203) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide path (e.g., a first guide path or a second guide path) that guides the gaming media in the storage section to the payout section. 204) and a cover portion (e.g., a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guiding passage forming portion, the cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) for limiting the fall of a screw member (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen onto the cover portion to the guiding passage forming portion (see Figures 22 and 24), and the guiding passage forming portion is provided with a specific limiting portion (e.g., hole 27) for limiting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion. a plurality of predetermined restriction sections (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided (see Figures 11, 12, and 27), the predetermined restriction sections (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen onto the cover section can fall from above the cover section without being retained therein, and further comprising: a launching means capable of launching game media into the game area in response to an operation by a player; and a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game media can flow in the game area, and includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, displays the second guidance display before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, and during a period after the predetermined period, ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover section from falling into the guide path forming section. It also makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has become mixed into the guide path forming section from becoming mixed into the payout section. In addition, since gaming media do not become stuck in the specified restricting section and it is possible to maintain a state in which the screw member can always be stuck, it makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover section from falling into the guide path forming section. It also makes it possible to preferably execute instructions that encourage the player to launch the gaming ball in a specified direction.

In other words, by preventing the screw member from dropping or getting mixed into the guide passage forming section or the payout section, it is possible to make the gaming machine less prone to malfunction, and by emphasizing the instruction to launch the gaming ball in a specified direction with the first and second guidance displays for a specified period of time after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, and then instructing to launch the gaming ball in the specified direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over the first guidance display, it is possible to prevent the instruction from being overemphasized and making it less annoying, and furthermore, it is possible to first display the second guidance display to discreetly instruct the gaming ball to be launched in the specified direction, and then to make the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after that to clearly instruct the player to launch the gaming ball in the specified direction with the first guidance display. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less prone to malfunction when installed in an amusement facility and has easy-to-understand instructions on the direction in which the gaming ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of gaming machine that can prevent the screw member from falling or getting mixed into the guide passage forming portion or the payout portion, and can also suitably execute instructions to encourage the player to launch the gaming ball in a specified direction, there is provided a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, the gaming machine comprising: a launching means that can launch the gaming medium into the gaming area in response to the player's operation; and a guidance display means that uses an image display to display guidance to encourage the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area. The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, displays the second guidance display before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, and during a period after the predetermined period, ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed. An example of an example of the form of these gaming machines is described below as another example of the form.

Figure 31 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched from a specified ball launching device and hit into this gaming area.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include the display of a certain symbol in a flashing manner. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern" or "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern" or "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. Here, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. The special pattern games and the variable display of decorative patterns executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that a game ball can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 33), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 31). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area in a big prize opening) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progress of the production)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" in which the probability jackpot state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (such as "7") may be displayed in a line and stopped, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" in which the probability jackpot state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (such as "6") may be displayed in a line and stopped. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to show that the value of the big win game state is increasing may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 33. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Y), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; N), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, followed by a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 35 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 35. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 35.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 37 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 37 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 37 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result determination table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit determination values are set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination values regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination values from overlapping with the range of big hit determination values that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when the set value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 38 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on, so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 38 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 39, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

<Explanation of characteristic part 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the characteristic feature 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 40-1 to 40-60.

[Configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F]
A front view of a pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 40-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in Fig. 31. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Fig. 40-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a normal large winning opening) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the normal large prize opening, and making it easier for the game ball to enter the normal large prize opening.

When a gaming ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When a gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, a number of gaming balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 40-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the V large winning port and preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V large winning port and allowing the game ball to enter the V large winning port more easily.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024 (see FIG. 40-4) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as the large prize opening. The large prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a number of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening, the pachinko game machine 1 also has an attacca upper lamp 075F009U provided above the attacca, a lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided to the right of the image display device 5, and a board left lamp 075F009E provided to the left of the image display device 5.

The movable body lamp 9d illuminates the characters (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example, "XXX") attached to the movable body 32 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is stopped or in operation. The attacca lamp 9c illuminates the vicinity of the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The attacca upper lamp 075F009U illuminates the vicinity above the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D illuminates the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided on a housing imitating a character, and illuminates the housing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E illuminates the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The left board lamp 075F009E may be provided on a character-shaped housing, similar to the right board lamp 075F009F. The right board lamp 075F009F and the left board lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (left/right, up/down, etc.), similar to the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has multiple lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has frame lamps consisting of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Here, FIG. 40-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 also has a special symbol LED board 075F020 at the bottom left of the gaming board 2. The special symbol LED board 075F020 is controlled by the gaming control microcomputer 100, and is a board that plays the roles of the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, the regular reserved indicator 25C, the regular pattern indicator 20, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 31 by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also has a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120, and notifies the changes in the special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs.

Here, Figure 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 40-3(a), the special chart LED board 075F020 includes a special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 which indicates the variable display of the first special chart, a special chart 2 variable display unit 075F022 which indicates the variable display of the second special chart, a special chart 1 memory display unit 075F023 which indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special chart game, a special chart 2 memory display unit 075F024 which indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special chart game, a regular chart memory display unit 075F025 which indicates the regular chart reserved memory number, a regular chart display unit 075F026 which indicates the variable display of regular charts, a right hit display unit 075F030 which encourages the player to hit to the right, a special chance display unit 075F028 which indicates whether or not a special chance state is in effect, a time-saving display unit 075F029 which indicates whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, and a round display unit 075F027 which indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 075F020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 075F030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 075F030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball flows through the second flow path toward the second start winning hole or the large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole). In this embodiment, in the big win game after the big win occurs and in the game state after the big win game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right hit display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out and the right to the second special game can be obtained, or the game ball can enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during a round of a guaranteed jackpot, the V-large winning hole opens, and by hitting the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player can gain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large winning hole and be controlled into a guaranteed jackpot state. Therefore, hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 40-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 075F052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 075F053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 075F054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 075F055 that prompts the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/going out using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F053 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. The special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. Hereinafter, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the first special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the change display of the first special symbol. Also, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the second special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the change display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 075F055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 40-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 40-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L is connected to a lamp control board 14 and can be lit (blinked) by control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. Each of these movable body lamps 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these lamps collectively, are also referred to as game effect lamps 9.

The fourth pattern unit 075F050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special chart LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display can be lit (blinked) by the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
40-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 075F005D capable of displaying the first reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays, and a second reserved memory display area 075F005U capable of displaying the second reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 075F005J, which indicates that a special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the first and second reserved memory counts.

In the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 075F005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 075F005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 40-5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. For this reason, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 075F005F for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to Figs. 40-6 to 40-8.

(Big Win Type)
Fig. 40-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. As shown in Fig. 40-6, the winning type table shows the winning probability after the end of the winning game state, the base after the end of the winning game state, the variable time after the end of the winning game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the winning game for each type of winning in the winning game.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R sure-win jackpot, and 10R sure-win jackpot. In the following, each round may be indicated by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round. A 5R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker makes it difficult to win a V (for example, control that shortens the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning port to a specified time or control that does not allow the game ball to enter a specific area by repeatedly opening and closing the lid), and is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a normal jackpot, this low probability high base state continues until the earlier of the condition that the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs is met.

A 5R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) inside the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that always keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 10R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port always open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same presentation style of the fanfare presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the round presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs during the round of the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state are also common. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot has occurred, as long as they look at the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare presentation, and round presentation. Here, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot, the V large prize entry port opens in a specified round (in this embodiment, the 4th round). At this time, if the player can aim at the V-large winning hole and hit the ball to the right to get it into the V-large winning hole, the game state will be controlled to a special state.

As such, 5R normal jackpots and 5R special jackpots are also called chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a special jackpot has occurred until halfway through the round.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the V-large winning hole will open in a specified round (the 9th round in this embodiment) in the same way as in the case of a 5R special jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning hole by hitting it to the right, the game state will be controlled to a special jackpot state. However, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the fanfare presentation (for example, the background, the characters that appear, the sound effects, etc.), and the presentation style of the round presentation that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state are different from those of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R special jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a special jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R special jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 40-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 40-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not a hit is made. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by adding from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by adding again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of hit) that determines the type of hit as 5R normal hit, 5R variable hit, and 10R variable hit. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining the hit of a normal pattern) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern is generated. Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the initial value of Random 4) that determines the initial value of Random 4.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random R). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots, such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special jackpot, and a 10R special jackpot, that will be the jackpot game state is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 1). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 1.

Furthermore, first, a fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 3), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 4). Thus, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a normal reach, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the case of a miss, the fluctuation pattern types are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve a reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

These types of fluctuation pattern are set so that when the display result is incorrect, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern type differs between when the time-saving state is in effect and when the time-saving state is not in effect (when the time-saving state is in effect, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time, such as a normal fluctuation pattern type, is selected is set to be higher than when the time-saving state is not in effect), and therefore when the time-saving state is in effect, the fluctuation display time is shorter than when the time-saving state is not in effect.

In addition, such a variation pattern type may be set so that the selection ratio differs when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, so that when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the reserved number shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time compared to when the reserved number shortening control number is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the reserved number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variable display time such as a normal variable pattern type may be set to be higher compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect, so that the average variable display time is shorter compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect. In addition, in the reserved number shortening control, the variable display time of the variation pattern type itself may be shortened even when the same variable pattern type is selected compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern may be determined in a one-step method in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by a single random number drawing, rather than in a two-step method in which the fluctuation pattern type is determined first and then the fluctuation pattern is determined.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
40-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big win determination table and a big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 40-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the left column of FIG. 40-8(A) set as jackpot determination values, and the special jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the right column of FIG. 40-8(B) set as jackpot determination values. The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values (called special jackpot determination values or second jackpot determination values) than the special jackpot determination table, by adding special jackpot determination values specific to the special jackpot state to the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table (called normal jackpot determination values or first jackpot determination values). This allows the special jackpot state to be determined as a jackpot with a higher probability than the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of a random number (random R) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 40-8 (A), it decides to determine a jackpot for the special symbol (either a normal jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 40-8 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

Figures 40-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 40-8(B) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 40-8(C) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 40-8(B) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, and the jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "5R normal jackpot", "5R sure jackpot", and "10R sure jackpot" are set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 40-8(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and the jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R sure jackpot".

As shown in Fig. 40-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to a "5R normal jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "1". The judgment value corresponding to a "5R sure-variable jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "10R sure-variable jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7". The special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F022 in the special pattern LED board 075F020 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. Similarly, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth pattern unit 075F050 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to each jackpot pattern.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

According to these various jackpot type determination tables, for jackpots with the second special symbol, the percentage of "10R sure jackpot" selected is higher than for jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol, and the percentage of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player selected is higher.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 40-9 is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Note that, although "(H)" indicates hexadecimal in the following description, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8001 (H) or command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special pattern (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). In other words, when a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R special jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R special jackpot has been determined. The miss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R special jackpot designation command, and 10R special jackpot designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the changing of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power-on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state command that specifies the background of the special probability state. Each of the normal state command, time-saving state command, and special probability state command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R special jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command, jackpot start 2 designation command, and jackpot start 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of a 5R special jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot end 1 designation command, jackpot end 2 designation command, and jackpot end 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a start winning is made at the first or second start winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates whether or not a winning has occurred, and the type of jackpot judgment result, among the winning judgment results. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results (fluctuation pattern type judgment result).

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be generated, the type of jackpot, and the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, which range of judgment values it falls within. Then, it sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F will be described. First, the process by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 40-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 40-10, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step 075FS001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set, which indicates that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, the customer waiting demo designation command is controlled not to be sent again based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 judges whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 indicated by the special pattern pointer based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step 075FS009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 40-8) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot.

In the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a probability variable state (normal game state or time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table with the values on the right side of FIG. 40-8(A) set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table with the values on the left side of FIG. 40-8(A) set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 40-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 075FS011), proceed to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number (random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 40-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 40-8(C) are selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-8(B). Additionally, when the special symbol pointer is pointing to "second," the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013, determines the jackpot type and jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 40-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern is set so that the jackpot pattern differs for each jackpot type, and the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined simultaneously, which simplifies the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type, thereby preventing the game control from becoming complicated.

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, if the jackpot type is a "5R normal jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "01". If the jackpot type is a "5R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "02". If the jackpot type is a "10R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "03".

Next, the CPU 103 sets the stopping symbol for the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol, is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R normal jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "1". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "3". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "10R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "7".

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step 075FS017) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 40-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 40-11, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern type determination table for the jackpot according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern type determination table for the miss. Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the fluctuation pattern type to one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected table.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (S112) (step 075FS105).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 40-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation process. As shown in Fig. 40-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S113) (step 075FS203). When the variation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 40-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 40-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 (step 075FS301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the big win flag is set (step 075FS303). If the big win flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, it transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in all 1R to 5R, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In the case of a 5R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 4th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In addition, in the case of a 10R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 9th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time-saving state has ended, and the time-saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display that results in a miss display occurs a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process transitions to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag indicating the probability variable state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variable flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315) and proceeds to step 075FS316. If the probability variable flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process of step 075FS314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step 075FS315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 40-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 40-14, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (for example, data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306) (step 075FS405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening processing (S115) (step 075FS406), and ends the processing.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
40-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 40-15, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step 075FS502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step 075FS503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 075F024 is on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the high probability variable flag is set (step 075FS506). The high probability variable flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled into the high probability variable state when a V win occurs. If the high probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the high probability variable flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V win switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V win switch 075F024 is not on (N in step 075FS507), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS508), a probability change determination device pass command is sent (step 075FS509), and processing proceeds to step 075FS510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V large prize opening (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
40-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 40-16, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process ends.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V large prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the big win opening is in progress (step 075FS610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big win opening processing (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 40-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 40-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the large prize opening control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the high probability flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the high probability flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step 075FS710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), then in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in the time-saving state (step 075FS705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Performance processing during big win)
Next, the processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 40-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance processing during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 40-18, in the performance processing during a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and are erased at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot end command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). If the process timer has timed out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 075FS656). In addition, the performance device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is controlled according to the content of the next set process data (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from ROM 121 according to the content of the process data in order to display an image corresponding to the performance during the round on the image display device 5, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the lighting/flashing/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output sound. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the presentation devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) continues according to the contents of the set process data (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the performance control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance under the control of the performance device. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 to encourage the player to hit right.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command (A1 series command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the mid-round performance in order to execute the mid-round performance under the control of the performance device, as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R normal jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V-type probability variation indication effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R normal jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify when the jackpot is in progress that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing an indication corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V-type probability variation indication effect).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V special jackpot suggestion performance (see Figs. 40-41). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V special jackpot suggestion performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the third round of a five round probability jackpot, the CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V notice performance (see FIG. 40-42) that notifies the player that the next fourth round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a five round probability jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, the third round) based on the command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V notice performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing the "Aim for V" performance (see FIG. 40-43) that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening, which has already been received, and specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 3R) based on the command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the specified post-round during the jackpot. The "Aim for V" performance is a guide display using an image display related to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V presentation, an image is displayed that encourages the player to hit to the right to launch the game ball toward the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V presentation, an image may be displayed that points to the V large prize opening itself, which is a specific area, an image may be displayed that points to the vicinity of the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed that points to the path to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4th round of a 5R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 40-44). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 4th round) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, the Aim for V performance).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance that notifies the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 8th round) based on the command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V notice performance) that corresponds to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command (A208 command) specifying the time after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a "Aim for V" presentation that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the already received command specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 8R) based on the command specifying the time after the opening of the large prize opening (A208 command), and sets process data for executing a presentation corresponding to the end of the round during the specified jackpot (in this case, the "Aim for V" presentation).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9th round of a 10R special jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the "Aim for V" performance. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 9R) based on the command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during a jackpot round, it sets process data corresponding to the V winning presentation in order to execute the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 4R of a 5R probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see Figures 40-44).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 9R of a 10R probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance.

In addition, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, it sets process data for executing an ending presentation (see Figures 40-46 and 40-47) that indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data based on the performance control commands received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the performance devices such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9 to execute various performances.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, but the following will particularly explain the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits with the left hand to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. When the result of the first special game is that the special game 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special pattern game include a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special chance jackpot, and a 10R special chance jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050, for example, LEDs or other lighting means to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (for example, five times for a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening continues until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V large prize entry port opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, there will be no V prize. Also, since there will be no V prize, the Aim for V performance will not be executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round will be displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V special probability suggestion performance is executed, which suggests whether or not there is a special probability jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special probability suggestion performance, it is announced that it is a normal jackpot, not a special probability jackpot. After that, the V large prize entry port opens in the 4th round, but no V prize occurs, and then in the 5th round, the normal large prize entry port opens, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is executed.

In the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which indicates whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect is executed, which indicates that the next 4th round is a V opening round. In the 4th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 5th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st through 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 8th round, a V notice effect is executed, which announces that the next 9th round is a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 10th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times for a 5R normal jackpot, 150 times for a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot). Furthermore, in the case of a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to the special jackpot state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to the time-saving state. In other words, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a low-probability high-base state, and in the case of a 5R special jackpot or a 10R special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a high-probability high-base state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. As a result of the second special game, when the special game 2 variable display section 075F022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the type of jackpot in the second special game is the 10R guaranteed jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Because it is a 10R sure-win jackpot, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big prize opening is only open in the 9th round. Specifically, like the first win, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round that follows, a V notice performance is executed, notifying the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V big prize opening is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This grants the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a sure-win state. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, an ending performance is executed.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 also ends. This allows the player to hit the ball from the left again to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
With reference to Fig. 40-19 to Fig. 40-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F will be described. Fig. 40-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. Fig. 40-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. Fig. 40-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Fig. 40-19 to Fig. 40-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 40-19, at t1, when the first special symbol game starts with the game ball entering the first start winning hole, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying decorative symbols in response to the change in the first special symbol, and for executing a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the first special symbol.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D and updates the lighting state of the special pattern 1 memory display unit 075F051 by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies that the special pattern will start to change based on the pattern change specification command, and sets the start timing of the performance. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result specification command, and determines the corresponding decorative pattern. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 also sets the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of a reach, etc.), and the content of the performance during the variable display of the decorative pattern (type of reach performance, etc.) based on the change pattern specification command.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the special symbol fluctuation stop, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a fanfare performance and lights up lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for displaying an image congratulating the jackpot on the image display device 5 as a fanfare performance, and outputting a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image encouraging right-hitting on the image display device 5 as a right-hit promotion performance, and outputs a sound encouraging right-hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 40-20, when the big win round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big win opening and sends a big win opening open command (A101 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the first round.

After that, when the first round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the second round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the second round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V probability change suggestion performance (see Figures 40-41) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when the second round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the third round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the third round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V preview performance (see Figures 40-42) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command).

After that, when the third round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance from after the third round to the fourth round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see Figures 40-43) based on the command (A203 command) to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 40-21, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 40-42) and then the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 40-43) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when a V win occurs at t11, the CPU 103 sends a command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify passage of the probability change determination device. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V win performance (see Figures 40-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (A3 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending performance.

After that, the game is controlled to a high probability state and a time-saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the performance control command depending on whether the number of reserved memories exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, if the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying the decorative patterns in response to the change in the second special pattern, and for executing a performance during change (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the second special pattern.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 40-60) that allows the player to identify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern on the image display device 5, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 40-60, and may be any performance that allows the player to identify that no game is being played, such as a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1.

[Lamp lighting status]
Fig. 40-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting state of the lamps. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, right panel lamp 075F009F, left panel lamp 075F009E, right frame lamp 075F009R, left frame lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in black as shown in Fig. 40-22 (A) when each of them is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are shown in a white-painted manner as shown in Figure 40-22 (B) when they are lit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are each shown as being lit/blinking/off in a manner corresponding to the performance and the background displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in the hatched form in Figure 40-22 (C).

[Performance of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, a description will be given of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game. Figures 40-23 to 40-33 and 40-38 to 40-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 40-23(a), when a losing symbol stops due to the variation of the special symbol in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the variation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or executes a variation-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each of the performances in Fig. 40-23(b1) to Fig. 40-24(b3) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the performances performed between Fig. 40-23(b1) to Fig. 40-24(b3) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-23(b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 40-23(b2), in the event of a jackpot variation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 40-24(b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stop of the special symbol fluctuation, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 40-24(c1) to FIG. 40-38(d2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command) and the right-hit display lighting command (FD command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-24(c1) to FIG. 40-38(d2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

Here, the fanfare effect will be explained in detail. The fanfare effect is divided into multiple effect parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a celebration part, a name display part, and a right-hit promotion part. The celebration part is an effect part in which an effect to celebrate a jackpot is executed, and as described later in FIG. 40-24 (c1), an image celebrating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode celebrating the jackpot. The name display part is a presentation part that informs the player that a jackpot round is about to start by announcing the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred, and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot game state that has occurred. As described later in Fig. 40-24 (c2) and (c3), a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. The right hit promotion part is a presentation part that encourages the player to hit right, and as described later in Fig. 40-24 (c4) to Fig. 40-33 (c29), a big right hit promotion presentation is executed that encourages the player to hit right using image displays of letters and figures. After the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is confirmed, the performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command (8F00) from the CPU 103, and then starts a fanfare performance based on the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, and continues the fanfare until the regular jackpot opening opens and the jackpot round begins.

As shown in FIG. 40-24(c1), as the congratulatory part in the fanfare performance, an image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the player on the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting state congratulating the player on the big win. In addition, as a right-hit promotion performance, a small right-hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The image display device 5 has multiple layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 40-24(c1), the image consisting of a figure and text in the small right-hit promotion performance is displayed on a layer on the front side (toward the player as seen from the pachinko game machine 1) of the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!"). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound encouraging right-hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-hitting promotion performance, the lighting state of the right-hitting display unit 075F030 and the right-hitting display unit 075F055 changes to a state encouraging right-hitting (lighting in this example). The start order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), and lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F055 based on the received right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), while displaying an image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-hitting promotion performance and an image celebrating the jackpot based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 command) on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image celebrating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, and then the images consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the image celebrating the big win are displayed in that order. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 are performed until the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. At that time, first, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display unit 075F055 based on the received right hit display off designation command, while ending the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and displaying the normal background image on the image display device 5 based on the received background designation command. Note that the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance coincides with the lighting period by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, making it easier for the player to understand the period for hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare performance, a part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "CHANCE" from the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 40-25(c3), as the name display part in the fanfare performance, following FIG. 40-24(c2), the remaining part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "BONUS!!" from the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right hit promotion performance that is executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare performance that begins at the next timing. After that, from FIG. 40-24(c4) to FIG. 40-33(c29), a big right hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed large in the center of the image display device 5 as a right hit promotion performance.

Here, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIG. 40-34 to FIG. 40-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs guidance lighting to encourage the player to hit the right by moving the light-emitting part of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In this embodiment, the light-emitting part literally refers to the part that is emitting light. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the other lamps that are not lit (i.e., the lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the light-emitting part. Note that in other examples, the light-emitting part refers to the part that is emitting light with high brightness. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light-emitting part is not called the light-emitting part. The lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 is explained in detail below.

Figure 40-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. As shown in Figure 40-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the performance time of each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the movable body lamp 9d, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, the board left lamp 075F009E, the board right lamp 075F009F, and the attacca lamp 9c. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is set to perform a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, the big right hit promotion effect is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), so the game effect lamp 9 will repeat the 2000 msec big right hit promotion effect twice.

Figure 40-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in Figure 40-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, the time for each of the fanfare effects and big right hit promotion effects is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

Here, for the big right hit promotion effect, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L are assigned a common grandchild table W11. In addition, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, and the board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild tables are provided. This allows the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible. For the attacca lamp 9c, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, 2000 msec, is further divided into multiple periods, and multiple grandchild tables are assigned. For example, grandchild table A11a is assigned to 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is assigned to 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is assigned to 320 msec.

Figures 40-36 and 40-37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. Figure 40-36 shows data in grandchild table W11 for frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in Figure 40-36, in grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further data for all lamps being off (0x000000) is specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that in the grandchild table, data for lamps 1 to 11 as shown in Figure 40-2 is specified for each of frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. Also, in Figure 40-36, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, dashed circles are added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T2, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T3, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T4, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6, At T3 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T7 the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T10 the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T11 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After lighting begins, each lamp continues to light up while changing color to form seven colors. After that, first, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T49, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T50, and then the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T51. The third lamp of 075F009R is turned off, then the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T52, then the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T53, then the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T54, then the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T55, then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, the time used to turn the lights on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is completely turned off, the final time to turn the lights off is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off for the entire time.

When the grandchild table W11, which stores the above-mentioned data, is used, as shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24), the frame lamps will light up in seven colors, starting with the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L and going from the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R in an arch shape from the left to the right. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamps will be performed twice.

Figure 40-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable body lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 40-37, grandchild table K11 for movable body lamp 9d specifies RGB data over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further specifies data for all lamps to be off (0x000000) at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that grandchild table K11 specifies data for the left X (left X), middle X (middle X), and right X (right X) of the character "XXX" attached to movable body 32 for movable body lamp 9d. Also, in FIG. 40-37, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, a dashed circle is added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T4, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T5. After starting to turn on, each lamp continues to turn on while changing color to seven colors. Then, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Then, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. That is, the time spent turning it on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is spent turning it off, the final turn-off time is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Also, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (i.e., it remains off for the first T1 and T2), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

As shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24), when the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored is used, the movable body lamp 9d goes out while the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L are on, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out, and then each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. As a result, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in seven colors, starting with the lighting of the left X, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp, drawing an arch from the left side to the right side. This kind of big right hit promotion performance by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

Figure 40-37 also shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 40-37, in the grandchild table A11a for the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 330 msec that is the target for lighting, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified at 20 msec intervals for the 1350 msec that it is to light up. However, because the attacca lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a specific pattern (e.g., seven colors) over the 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one color change pattern. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of the 1350 msec to repeat the color changes in the specific pattern (e.g., seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the Attacka lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 320 msec that is the target for turning the lamp on, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, then causes the attacca lamp 9c to repeat color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to the grandchild table A11b multiple times at 280 nsec intervals for 1,350 msec, and then turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the final 320 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 40-25 (c4) to 40-32 (c24), the frame lamps light up in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R reaches the vicinity of the attacca, and then the attacca lamp 9c lights up, and then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out, and then the attacca lamp 9c goes out. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the attacca lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacca lamp 9c, where the lamp is initially turned off, a predetermined pattern of colors is repeated in the middle, and then the lamp is turned off again, the lighting of the attacca lamp 9c is divided into three stages and a scenario is created. For the repetition of the predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referenced. This eliminates the need to prepare data for the entire duration of the 2000 msec lighting from start to finish, and only the data for the repeated portion is required. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 40-25 (c4), we will now explain the presentation mode of the big right hit promotion presentation executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 40-25 (c4), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L begins to light up. In line with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right hit promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 40-25 (c5), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (c6), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (c7), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (c8), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-27 (c9), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-27 (c10), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-27 (c11), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-28 (c12), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-28 (c13), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-28 (c14), an arrow image pointing to the right continues to be displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, the character image "Right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing in the right direction. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacca lamp 9c, the attacca lamp 9c starts to light up. From that point on, the attacca lamp 9c repeatedly lights up and goes out (i.e., it flashes). In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the X in the middle of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In addition, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. In addition, the board right lamp 075F009F goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the flashing attacca lamp 9c also goes out. Sound output from speakers 8L and 8R also stops. This ends the first series of big right-hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 40-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion effect starts. At this time, of the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Note that during the second big right hit promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are designed not to output sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion effect. This prevents the background music during the big hit round (sound corresponding to the background of the big hit round) from overlapping with the sound during the big right hit promotion effect when the transition occurs after the big right hit promotion effect has ended.

As shown in Figure 40-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hit promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks/goes off in the same manner as in the first big right hit promotion performance, and during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in the manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

In this way, the big right hit promotion effect uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right hit promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit to the right in a more emphatic manner than the small right hit promotion effect. Therefore, by executing the big right hit promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound (for example, a whirring sound effect) is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, effectively encouraging the player to hit to the right, while during the second big right hit promotion performance, a sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, so as not to interfere with the background music during the big win round that starts afterwards.

In addition, in the big right hit promotion effect, the arrow image and the letter image are displayed so that they gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage the player to hit to the right, and this effect is more flashy than the effect that displays the name image of the big win game state shown in Figure 40-24 (c2). For example, the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect appear one by one, but all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state appear at once. Also, the size of the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect is larger than all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state. Furthermore, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect that displays the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big win game state is displayed to notify the player that a big win has occurred, the big right hit promotion effect can more emphatically notify the player to hit to the right.

The attacca lamp 9c is the point that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and flashes to draw the player's attention to the point that they are aiming at. Note that the attacca lamp 9c may also be constantly lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without flashing.

The following example describes the presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R special jackpot occurs. For a 10R special jackpot, the number of rounds is different, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot. Also, for a 5 regular jackpot, it is different in that the V preview presentation and V winning presentation are not executed, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 40-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right hit promotion effect ends, the switch to the big win round starts as shown in FIG. 40-38 (c27). Specifically, the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" fade out, gradually decreasing visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 turns white. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. Note that, as described above, a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 40-38 (c28) is set based on the big win start designation command (A0 series command).

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is in progress. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data for each effect in FIG. 40-39 (d3) to FIG. 40-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command). In other words, each effect that takes place between FIG. 40-39 (d3) to FIG. 40-40 (e4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-39 (d3), the entire screen of the image display device 5 goes completely white, and then the background image during the big win round fades in to appear. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that corresponds to the fade-in. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, we will explain "fade in" and "fade out" in more detail. Fade in and fade out are a type of image display effect called a "transition." A "transition" is a switching effect that is inserted between a first cut (image) and a second cut (image) when editing video and the scene changes from the first cut to the second cut (image). In addition to fade in and fade out, transitions also include various techniques used in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (such as a background or character) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific technique, fade-in changes the transparency (also called transmittance) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined period is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 100% (first degree) to 50% over the 1 second period between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 0% (second degree) over the next 1 second period between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, fade-in is not a technique that does not gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) over a certain period of time, such as a technique that changes an object (image) to opaque by switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) in one go. Note that if opacity (which can also be called opacity) is changed instead of transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned percentage values are reversed. In other words, fade-in changes the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%), which is higher than the second degree, over a certain period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific technique, in fade out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed over a predetermined time from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) that is higher than the first degree. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 0% (second degree) to 50% over one second between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 100% (first degree) over one second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, a technique that does not gradually change the transparency (transmittance) over a predetermined time, such as a technique that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) in one go to make the object (image) transparent, is not a fade out. In addition, when changing opacity (opacity) instead of transparency (transmittance), the fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (c26) and (d1), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%, so that the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" are gradually made transparent and difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is located further back than the first layer of the screen, is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually decreased to 0%, so that the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque and easy to see (fade in). This allows the player to see the background image during the jackpot round on the first layer, which is located in front of the second layer of the screen.

Note that there is also a technique called "cross-fade" as a transition. Cross-fade is a technique in which, for example, a first layer of a screen showing some kind of object is faded out while a second layer of a screen showing some kind of object located behind the first layer is faded in, so that the first layer of the screen is shown first and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that a white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located behind is shown once during the switch from the image in the ED first period to the image in the ED second period, which is different from a technique like cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the background image is switched as in the transition described above, the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the background image switching. Here, "affected by the background image switching" means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by fading in or out of the background image switching, which may cause the player to be unable to completely see the image of the small right hit promotion effect, or the player to be able to see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion effect but not understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion). On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the background image switching.

As shown in FIG. 40-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 40-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal big prize opening opens and a background image corresponding to the round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) in a manner corresponding to the round performance. In addition, as mentioned above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 40-40 (e2), during the first round, a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 40-40(e3), when the first round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 40-40 (e4), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance displayed in the upper right.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the second round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 40-41 (e5) to FIG. 40-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-41 (e5) to FIG. 40-42 (e8) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-41 (e5), when the second round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, an image encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed with the text image "PUSH!!" superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is still displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect).

As shown in FIG. 40-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B during the V-type probability variation indication effect, a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect, to notify the player that a V-type probability variation jackpot has been obtained. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect).

As shown in FIG. 40-42 (e8), when the second round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 40-42 (e9), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the third round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 40-42 (e10) to FIG. 40-43 (e12) based on the special prize opening command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-42 (e10) to FIG. 40-43 (e12) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-42 (e10), when the third round begins, the regular big prize opening opens and the V preview performance is executed. Specifically, a character image and a text image saying "Grab a V in the next round!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance. In addition, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e11), during the third round, the V preview performance continues, and a text image of "Grab a V in the next round!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a character image, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance).

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e12), when the third round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening opens. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "Aim for V" performance in the rounds from after the third round to the fourth round, based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), the Aim for V performance is executed while the large prize opening remains closed between rounds, i.e., the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening. Specifically, an arrow image pointing to the V variable prize ball device 075F007B (V large prize opening), which is the target (location) that the player is to aim at by hitting with the right, and a text image saying "Aim" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with a background image corresponding to the round performance. In this way, according to the Aim for V performance, the image display related to the V large prize opening can be used to encourage the player to hit with the right to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance).

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A104 command) to the presentation control CPU 120. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in Figs. 40-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the special prize opening command (A104 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between Figs. 40-44 (e14) and 40-44 (e15) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large prize opening opens and the Aim for V effect is then executed. This allows the player to aim for the V large prize opening by hitting to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect).

As shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15), during the 4R, the Aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect).

When a game ball enters the V large winning hole and a V win occurs, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in Fig. 40-44 (e16) to Fig. 40-45 (e18) based on the command to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between Fig. 40-44 (e16) to Fig. 40-45 (e18) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, an image of a "V" indicating that a V winning has occurred is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round effect, and then an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 40-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 40-45 (e18), between rounds, the V large prize opening and the normal large prize opening remain closed, and an image of the letter "V" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A105 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in FIG. 40-45 (e19) to FIG. 40-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between FIG. 40-45 (e19) to FIG. 40-46 (e21) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-46 (e20), during the 5th round, a mid-round performance is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the large prize opening normally closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify when the large prize opening is opened. The performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command. Furthermore, at a specified timing thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a command (A3 command) to specify when the large prize opening is opened to the CPU 120 for performance control. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes an ending performance based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 40-46 (f1) to FIG. 40-47 (f4) based on the command (A3 command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between Figure 40-46 (f1) and Figure 40-47 (f4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-46 (f1), when the ending performance starts, an image that allows the player to select a stage in the probability variable state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image indicating the name of the special state (in this example, a text image of "Yume Yume RUSH!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 together with a character image. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-47 (f3), during the ending performance, an addiction prevention notification performance is executed. Specifically, an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to become addicted. Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation," is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for encouraging a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. In addition, when a consecutive win occurs, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of winning balls) in the jackpot game state is displayed, for example, at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but such a game result image may also be displayed during the ending performance even when a first win occurs.

As shown in FIG. 40-47 (f4), a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card related to the game that the player owns, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending performance is finished, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative pattern in response to the change of the second special pattern based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special pattern. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance in Figures 40-48 (g1) and (g2) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between (g1) and (g2) in Figures 40-48 progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. Sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 40-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol stops and the losing symbol is displayed. At this time, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. The speakers 8L and 8R also output sounds in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol.

After the second special symbol stops changing, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in Figure 40-48 (g3) to Figure 40-49 (g5) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), symbol change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between Figure 40-48 (g3) and Figure 40-49 (g5) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. The speakers 8L and 8R also output sounds in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 40-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during a jackpot fluctuation. The group preview performance is a performance in which objects such as characters appear gradually or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5 to make the visibility of the reach pattern difficult, and then the objects disappear to make a specific pattern arrangement (for example, 777) appear. Even if a preview performance that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the performance image. Here, "affected by the display of the performance image" means that the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion performance is hindered or reduced by the display of a performance image such as a group preview, such that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right hit promotion performance, or the player can see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion performance but cannot understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion), and the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the display of the effect image.

When the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 40-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R guaranteed jackpot) occurs as a result of the special symbol stopping, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that since the right-hit promotion performance has already been executed, the right-hit display lighting command (FD command) is not sent. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on a command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 40-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 40-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 40-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image celebrating the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yay!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the big win is output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state celebrating the big win. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2), after the fanfare effect starts, a name image (in this example, a text image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of a consecutive win on a special chart 2, since the big right hit promotion effect has already been executed when the special chart 1 was hit, the big right hit promotion effect is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (c4) to FIG. 40-32 (c24), the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and furthermore, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect for the first round.

As shown in FIG. 40-50 (i1), when the first round of the big win begins, the normal big prize opening opens, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as the V preview effect, the Aim for V effect, and the V prize are executed during the round as shown in Fig. 40-40 to Fig. 40-46, and when the big win round ends, an ending effect is executed as shown in Fig. 40-46 and Fig. 40-47. Then, as shown in Fig. 40-48, the game is again controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state. During this series of games, an image (arrow and letters) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each continue to light up. When the probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, the CPU 103 sends a right-hit display off command to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-hit promotion performance in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and turns off the right-hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. This allows the player to hit left again in the normal state.

[Presentation of the Pachinko Game Machine 1 When Power is Restored from an Outage]
Fig. 40-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to the hit of special chart 1. The power outage shown in Fig. 40-51 assumes power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare presentation as shown in Fig. 40-20 and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 40-51, if a power outage occurs in any of the following states: an image congratulating a player on a big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 40-24(c1) state); a name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, a text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 40-24(c2) state); only an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 40-28(c14) state); and a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect (FIG. 40-31(c23) state), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A101 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A101 command) is received, the performance image during 1R, such as that shown in FIG. 40-39 (e1), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A101 command). In addition, all of the images are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on, including the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, the character image and the text image "Congratulations!!"), the name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!"), the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, and the text image "Hit right!!" added to the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion effect is executed or before the big right hit promotion effect is completed, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the regular big prize opening.

Figure 40-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the first round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-52 assumes power outage 2, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 40-20.

As shown in Figure 40-52, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance during round 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-40 (e2)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the CPU 120 receives the command, it displays a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 40-41 (e5), on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. If prize balls are obtained during the subsequent rounds, the points can be added again starting from 0pt, for example, by adding 10pt for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to being displayed as 0pt after the power is restored, and the points can be made unclear by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 40-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the round after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-53 assumes power outage 3, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after one round, as shown in Figure 40-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 40-53, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-40 (e4)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify whether the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A102 command) is received, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 40-41 (e5), based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0 points, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 40-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 2nd round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-54 assumes power outage 4, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 40-20.

As shown in Figure 40-54, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the V-variable indication effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-41 (e7)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 40-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 40-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 40-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-55 assumes power outage 5, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between two rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 40-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 40-55, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the second round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-42 (e9)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 40-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 40-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 40-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of a pachinko gaming machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-56 assumes power outage 6, which occurs when the power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds three rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 40-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 40-56, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the round after the third round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-43 (e13)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A104 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during the 4R based on the command (A104 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, because the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, because the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V performance as shown in Figure 40-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A104 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute the Aim for V performance as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e14) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the V large prize opening in the next round.

Figure 40-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-57 assumes power outage 7, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 40-21.

As shown in Figure 40-57, if a power outage occurs when an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-44 (e15)), or when an image corresponding to the V winning presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5R, such as that shown in FIG. 40-45 (e19), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect is executed from the point when the power is turned on after that, so the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored from the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right and not being able to enter the normal big prize opening in the next round. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs while the Aim for V effect and the small right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as in the 4th round, and in the case where a power outage occurs while the small right hit promotion effect and the large right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as shown in Figures 40-51 above, both have in common that after the power is restored from the power outage, the Aim for V effect and the large right hit promotion effect are not executed, but the small right hit promotion effect is executed to the very least. Therefore, in both situations, the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored from the power outage in a common manner.

Figure 40-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-58 assumes power outage 8, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds four rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 40-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 40-58, if a power outage occurs during the rounds after the 4th round when an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 40-45 (e18)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 40-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-59 assumes power outage 9, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then restored, as shown in Figure 40-21.

As shown in Figure 40-59, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the mid-round performance during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 40-46 (e20)), or while the 5th round has ended (as shown in Figure 40-46 (e21)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end command (A3 system command), it displays a performance image corresponding to an ending performance such as that shown in Figure 40-46 (f1) on the image display device 5 based on the jackpot end command (A3 system command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so that the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to make a right hit as much as possible.

Figure 40-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 40-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending presentation and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 40-21.

As shown in FIG. 40-60, if a power outage occurs in any of the following ending effects, a state in which an image for selecting a stage in the high probability state after a jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 40-46(f1)), a state in which a name image showing the name of the high probability state together with a character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 40-47(f2)), a state in which an image corresponding to an addiction prevention notification effect and a game result image showing the game result in the jackpot game state are displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 40-47(f3)), and a state in which a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 40-47(f4)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

After that, if there are reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives these commands, it displays a performance image corresponding to the change of the special pattern as shown in Figure 40-48 (g1) on the image display device 5 based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command).

On the other hand, if there are no reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and upon receiving these commands, it restores the display on the image display device 5 with the initial pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern and small pattern "123") stopped based on the background designation command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on afterwards, so the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages such as forgetting to make a right hit and not being able to win in the second start winning slot in the special probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Major effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the above-mentioned feature portion 075F are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 40-25 (c4) to FIG. 40-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d1) and (d2), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, while the game medium is in a state in which it is impossible for the game medium to enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is performed and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
Thereafter, even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes to a state in which the game medium can enter the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 40-51 and FIG. 40-57).

(1-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 40-25 (c4) to FIG. 40-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round preceding the round in which the specific area can be entered, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), a portion in which an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of an attacker corresponding to a round preceding the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 40-51 and FIG. 40-57).

(1-3) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 40-25 (c4) to FIG. 40-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for designating that the large prize opening is in progress (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d1) and (d2), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the large right hit suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Then, by receiving a command after the end of the third round (for example, a command specifying after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-43 (e13), an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for designating the opening of the large prize opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15), a portion for continuing the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V-pass command (for example, a probability change determination device pass command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 40-51 and FIG. 40-57).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent games, and thereafter, the large right hit promotion effect is terminated while the small right hit promotion effect is continued as it is, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, the "Aim for V" effect for aiming at the V large prize winning hole is executed from the point when the V large prize winning hole is still closed, and is continued even after the V large prize winning hole is opened, so that the importance of aiming at the V large prize winning hole is appealed to the player, and it is possible to ensure that the game ball enters the V large prize winning hole. In addition, by terminating the "Aim for V" effect after the V large prize winning hole is closed due to the occurrence of the V prize winning, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right hit promotion effect is continuously executed, so that the player can be always encouraged to hit the right even before the V large prize winning hole is opened and after the V prize winning occurs. This allows the instruction to the player to hit to the right to be executed in an optimal manner. Also, in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, and in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after the power is turned on, so that even if a power outage occurs, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right in subsequent games at the very least.

(2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by a presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) using an image display to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during a predetermined period in which a start effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are displayed (e.g., an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-38 (c26)),
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-39 (e1) to FIG. 40-46 (e21), during a jackpot round, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect is not performed while an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect is continued),
In a special state (e.g., a probability variable state, a time-saving state) after the control of the advantageous state ends, the second guide display is continued (for example, a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance in the probability variable state after a jackpot as shown in Figs. 40-48 and 40-49),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (d1) to FIG. 40-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of a performance image in the special state (for example, an image display due to a group preview performance) (for example, a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display due to the group preview performance, as shown in Figure 40-49 (g5)).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent game, and during the subsequent big win round, the large right hit promotion effect is ended while the small right hit promotion effect is continued, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, by continuing the small right hit promotion effect even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. Furthermore, after the big win occurs, the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round, and the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the image display of the group notice effect that is performed in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, so that the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. This makes it possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 40-25 to 40-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the first of the guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a part that outputs a sound from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-32 (c26) to FIG. 40-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
In a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a sound is not output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion performance linked thereto is not output, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(3-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance message (for example, a message display encouraging a player to hit to the right) using an image display to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 40-25 to 40-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the first of the guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a part that outputs a sound from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-32 (c26) to FIG. 40-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
The guidance means does not emit the guidance light when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance in conjunction with the right hit promotion, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40-33).
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Figs. 40-25 to 40-33, a part that turns off the frame lamp once and then lights it in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output in conjunction with the guidance light being emitted (for example, as shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and no sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it is output, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 40-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 40-25 to FIG. 40-33).
The guiding means is
After turning off the light-emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 40-25 to 40-33, after turning off the light once, the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 40-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hit promotion effect shown in Fig. 40-25 to Fig. 40-33 is larger than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in Fig. 40-24 (c2), and the characters appear one by one in stages, and the execution time is longer and displayed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he or she should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output,
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps that are performed multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. For example, if the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is performed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, but do not output a sound in conjunction with the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect includes only sound data that is linked to the first right-hit promotion. This prevents the sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion from overlapping with the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hit promotion effect is performed, and allows the player to smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emitted among the multiple guidance light emissions;
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, and the speakers 8L and 8R also output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the subsequent right-hit promotions, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the last right-hit promotion. For example, when the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, and do not output a sound in conjunction with the third right-hit promotion. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect only includes sound data in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions. Note that the sound data only includes sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to two right hit promotions, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to two right hit promotions once. This allows the player to smoothly hear the background music during the jackpot round without the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion overlapping with the background music during the jackpot round that is output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-25(c3), a portion that turns off all of the frame lamps once and then lights up the frame lamps in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, all of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are lit in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion performance, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right in a clearer and more effective manner.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guidance light in association with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table,
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in Figure 40-34) that specifies the execution time of the guidance light emission, a child table (for example, the child table shown in Figure 40-35) that indicates a grandchild table in which data to be referenced by the light emission means is specified, and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in Figures 40-36 and 40-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9, including the frame lamps, refer to the parent table to determine the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, refer to the child table to determine the grandchild table in which the lighting data is specified, and refer to the grandchild table to turn on/blink/turn off. This allows the game effect lamps 9 to be lit efficiently in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) The grandchild table corresponding to the light-emitting means that does not emit the guidance light is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-35, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion performance and are therefore turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. This allows the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means performs the guidance light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, a portion that sequentially lights up each lamp included in the frame lamp from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in Figures 40-25 to 40-33).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 40-25 to 40-33, by lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp in sequence from the left side to the right side of the play area, a big right hit promotion effect is executed, which clearly encourages the player to hit to the right.

(12) The guidance means emits the guidance light while changing the light color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors while performing a big right-hit promotion effect, more effectively encouraging players to hit to the right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images, which is performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 40-38 (d1) to 40-39 (d4), the portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 40-38 (d1) to Fig. 40-39 (d4), the small right-hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the background image switching display caused by the fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right even if the background image switching display causes the fanfare effect to switch to the jackpot round.

(14) The second guidance display, as a display of a performance image in the special state, is not affected by a display in a preview performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to a small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display in the group preview performance).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5), in the probability variable state after the jackpot favorable state ends, the small right hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur. As a result, even if the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect being executed, the arrow image and text image in the small right hit promotion effect continue to be displayed without being hindered in visibility, so the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted either (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, as in the case of the first win, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized.

[Modification of characteristic portion 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part 075F will be described.

(About turning off the lights before the big right hit promotion performance is performed)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is turned on first in the big right hit promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be turned on. In this way, the connection when the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance afterwards can be clearly seen.

(About the display change during the big win round)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 40-38 (d1) to Fig. 40-39 (d4), when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, the background image is switched by fading in and out, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, may be used.

In addition, the display switching during the jackpot round may be such that a BGM selection screen is displayed to allow the player to select BGM (music), and the background image is switched to one that corresponds to the BGM selected on the BGM selection screen.

In addition, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a mode selection screen is displayed to allow the player to select a presentation mode, and the background image is switched to one corresponding to the mode selected on the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during a big win round, it is important that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(Display of the performance image during the probability change state after the big hit game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the reach effect, a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, a pseudo consecutive notice effect in which the decorative pattern changes and the temporary stop are repeated multiple times, or a light guide plate provided on the front side of the play area is turned on or blinked to make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult may be used. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(About the "Aim for the V" production)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning hole provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and an image pointing to the V large winning hole is displayed as the "Aim for V" performance as shown in Fig. 40-43 (e13). However, this is not limited to this, and the image display in the "Aim for V" performance, which is the third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area, is not limited to one pointing to the V large winning hole itself, but may also point to the vicinity of the V large winning hole, or may point to the path leading to the V large winning hole, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V large winning hole located upstream of the V large winning hole.

(Regarding the promotion of big right hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 40-25 (c4) to Fig. 40-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then the text image "Hit right!!" appears, but this is not limited to this. For example, the text image "Hit right!!" may appear first, and then the arrow graphic image may appear. In addition, the image display of the large right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas the image display of the small right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display, may be composed of only an arrow image or only a text image.

(About advantageous situations)
In this embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is exemplified as the period shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1) to FIG. 40-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 40-20 to t16 in FIG. 40-21), but is not limited thereto. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" may be the period excluding the fanfare effect period, that is, the period shown in FIG. 40-39 (d3) to FIG. 40-47 (f4) (the period from t4 in FIG. 40-20 to t16 in FIG. 40-21). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hit promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the pattern that will cause a jackpot is determined (pattern determination period).

(About the right-hand hit promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot on a special chart 1, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame lamp may be made different depending on the type of jackpot on a special chart 1. For example, when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a guaranteed jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. In addition, if the jackpot on special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

(About the right-hit promotion effect in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

Also, depending on the type of consecutive wins on the special chart 2, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot on the special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a sure-win jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. If the consecutive hits on special chart 2 are a guaranteed jackpot, unlike the first hit on special chart 1, the frame lamp may light up in a special manner (for example, gold or seven colors) according to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a special manner according to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, the big right hit promotion performance may be executed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit on special chart 1.

(Regarding the third guide sign)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, an image pointing to the V-large winning hole during the jackpot round in the probability jackpot has been exemplified, but this is not limited thereto. For example, as the third guidance display, in the probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends, an image urging the player to aim at the second start winning hole and launch the game ball, or an image urging the player to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and launch the game ball may be displayed. For example, after the ending performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 may display a text image of "Aim!" on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image pointing to the second start winning hole or the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) based on receiving a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a pattern change designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a change pattern designation command (81 system command) from the CPU 103. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and text images in the small right hit promotion performance may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding control of time-saving state by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be different from the pattern confirmation time for other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F, the game state must always go through the jackpot game state in order to be controlled to the time-saving state, so the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect for encouraging the player to hit the right in the time-saving state can be performed during the fanfare effect that is performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if the above-mentioned losing symbol is used as the time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state, so when the time-saving state is controlled in response to the display of the losing symbol, time must be secured to execute the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect between the display of the losing symbol and the control to the time-saving state. Therefore, the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect can be executed using the method shown below.

For example, if the pattern determination time until the fluctuation of a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern determination time until the losing pattern that is a time-saving pattern stops may be set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the time-saving pattern, and a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed during that time to notify the start of control of the time-saving state. In addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving as a command for specifying a loss, the CPU 103 may prepare a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving that grants time saving in addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving, and transmit a performance control command to the performance control CPU 120 using both commands depending on whether or not the time-saving pattern is a losing fluctuation. Then, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation, the pattern determination time may be set to 0.5 seconds, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving, the pattern determination time may be set to 30 seconds.

The performance control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") indicating the name of the time-saving state on the image display device 5 during the 30-second pattern determination time, outputs a sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state, and lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state. A portion of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a portion of the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c2).

40-24(c1), an image (for example, a text image of "Congratulations!") celebrating the time-saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5 before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, a sound celebrating the time-saving state may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to a lighting mode celebrating the time-saving state. Also, as a small right-hit promotion effect, a small right-hit promotion effect may be executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow pointing to the right) and text (the text "Right hit") is displayed small on the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a sound encouraging right hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-hit display unit 075F030 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 may be changed to a mode encouraging right hitting (lit). In addition, the image in the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 start and end at the same timing. In other words, both are designed to encourage the player to make a right hit for the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in FIG. 40-24(c2), the small right hit promotion effect may continue to be executed while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then, similar to the example shown in FIG. 40-25(c3), the game effect lamp 9 may be temporarily turned off, and then, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 40-25(c4) to FIG. 40-38(c26), the large right hit promotion effect may be executed during the time-saving fanfare effect. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after the large right hit promotion effect is executed, the game state may be controlled to the time-saving state, and the small right hit promotion effect may be continued, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 40-48 to FIG. 40-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing pattern, by ensuring a pattern determination time that is longer than the pattern determination time for a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern, it is possible to execute a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect during that pattern determination time.

In the case where the time-saving state is controlled by the losing symbol as a trigger, it is not limited to using the symbol determination time to execute the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect as described above. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to a miss for the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving is determined, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed in the next game (change). Specifically, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a miss change, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed instead without executing an effect that makes you expect a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect. However, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 40-24 (c1) is executed afterwards, so the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for the next game (change) after the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving bonus has been confirmed, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed while the symbol is not changing, and the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and the time-saving fanfare effect being hindered, the CPU 103 is not sent a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Alternatively, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) from the CPU 103, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Sound control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First start port switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Count switch 25A First hold indicator 25B Second hold indicator 25C General hold indicator 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gate 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control unit 200 Dispensing device 202 First guide path forming unit 201 Ball tank forming unit 203 First path forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover body 271A to 271H Hole portion 314, 324, 334 Cover portion 340 Ball stopper member N1 to 6, 11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
a recovery display means for displaying a recovery display when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
The second guidance display is displayed during a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed,
performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period that is within the predetermined period and that is subsequent to the first period;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
During a period in which an end effect related to the end of the control of the advantageous state is being executed, the second guidance display is displayed;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
The guidance light emission is light emission in a pattern in which the light emission point moves from the first region side to the second region side,
The guide light emitting means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means can emit light in a manner different from a light-emitting manner of the light-emitting means during the guidance light emission,
turning off the light emitting means before the second period begins;
When the second period starts, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display;
A gaming machine in which, in either case where a power outage occurs while the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being displayed during the second period, or where a power outage occurs while the second guidance display is being displayed during a period after the specified period, when power supply to the gaming machine is subsequently started, the recovery display is performed and the second guidance display is commonly displayed while the recovery display is being displayed .